UF 9000 Service Manual v3 0

Order Number: MGCS031201C0
J7
Facsimile
UF-9000
DP-180/190
[ Version 3.0 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit

Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:
Distinction of PbF PCB:
PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a
mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in
the product design without reservation and without notice.
Published in Japan.
Important Notice
Please read this notice completely BEFORE repairing or
installing any optional accessories. As failure to properly install
the additional board or connector with the power ON could
damage the machines SPC or SC board.
Please follow the instructions below:
1. It is essential that you turn OFF the Main Power Switch located
on the Left Side of the machine.
2. It is essential that you unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall
outlet. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution
disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging
the AC Power Cord.)
3. Please read the installation instructions carefully and follow
each step.
<Example: UF-9000>
Note:
O = Power OFF, l = Power ON
Note:
If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being
performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC),
it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF
the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the
Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)",
continue to step 2 below.
2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive
Unit and advances into "ENERGY SAVER MODE".
4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves
the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.
This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
WARNING
Power and Ground Connection Cautions
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually
cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is
required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or
become hot to the touch.
Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized
Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric
shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or
abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.
Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.
Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and
cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord
forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.
If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation
can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine
for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause
electric shock.
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual
condition, contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause
severe burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or
shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the
machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause
smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the
cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.
Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,
get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Installation and Relocation Cautions
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that
may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to
these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine.
The weight of the machine : 43.6 kg / 96.12 lb
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine
e with proper
packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the
power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the
document glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labeled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet
of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it when it is hot, to avoid
injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbonic paper and coated paper. When
a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or
the heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to
minimize the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.
Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the
machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is
wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or
impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Consumable Safeguards
WARNING
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge can
cause an explosion and you can get burnt.
Never throw toner or a waste toner container or a toner cartridge into an open flame. It
can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.
Keep button batteries out of the reach of children. If a button battery is swallowed
accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together. Otherwise, batteries can burst or leak,
causing fire or injuries.
Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Table of Contents
Specifications Table................................... 9
1.1.
Control Panel ............................................9
1.2.
Copy Function.........................................11
1.3.
Fax, Printer and Internet Fax

Functions ................................................19
1.4.
System Combination...............................29
1.5.
Options List.............................................30
1.6.
External View..........................................32
1.7.
Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan ......36
1.8.
Sensors and PC Boards .........................36
6.4.
Installation ............................................. 255

7.1.
Set Up Precautions .............................. 255
7.2.
Unpacking ............................................ 257
7.3.
Installation Procedure .......................... 258
Options and Supplies ............................ 264

8.1.
Service Notes "Firmware Update"

for PCL or PS Option Installation ......... 264
8.2.
Installing the Printer Controller Module

for PCL6 (DA-PC190: UF-9000;
DA-PC188: DP-180/190)...................... 272
8.3.
Installing the Printer Controller Module

for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC190: UF-9000;
DA-MC188: DP-180/190) ..................... 274
8.4.
Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit

(DA-HD19) ........................................... 276
8.5.
Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board

(DA-EM600) ......................................... 284
8.6.
Installing the Sorting Image Memory

16 / 64 / 128 MB
(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B) ...................... 286
8.7.
Installing the Expansion Flash Memory

Card 4/8 MB
(UE-410047/410048)............................ 288
Disassembly Instructions ......................... 37

2.1.
General Disassembly..............................37
2.2.
Disassembly Instructions ........................38
2.3.
Hardware Identification Template ...........69
Signal Waveform .................................. 203
Maintenance, Adjustments and Check

Points....................................................... 71
3.1.
Preventive Maintenance .........................71
3.2.
Required Tools .......................................73
3.3.
Preventive Maintenance Points ..............74
3.4.
Preventive Maintenance Check List .......75
3.5.
Updating the Firmware ...........................76
3.6.
Adjusting the Printer Registration,

LSU Image Side to Side .........................86
8.8.
Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module

(DA-DS188).......................................... 289
Troubleshooting ....................................... 88
8.9.
Installing the Handset Kit

(UE-403171/UE-403172) ..................... 293
4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............88
4.2.
Improper LCD Display ............................89
4.3.
Printed Copy Quality Problems...............90
4.4.
Document Feeder (ADF) ......................106
4.5.
Communications ...................................109
9.1.
Network Protocol .................................. 297
4.6.
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......115
9.2.
Layer Functions and Technology ......... 299
4.7.
Error Codes (For Copier) ......................123
9.3.
Network Layer ...................................... 303
4.8.
Information Code Table

(For Facsimile)......................................130
9.4.
Transport Layer .................................... 307
4.9.
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........137
9.5.
Upper Layer ......................................... 309
9.6.
SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 314
9.7.
ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................ 315
9.8.
Communication Protocols .................... 321
9.9.
POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 324
8.10. Installing the Mechanical Counter Kit

(DZTQ000066) ..................................... 294
General Network Information................. 297
4.10. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................144
Service Modes ....................................... 146

5.1.
Service Modes (For Copier)..................146
5.2.
Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............163
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 327
System Description................................ 194

6.1.
Scanning / Transmit Mechanism ..........194
6.2.
Control Panel ........................................195
6.3.
Printer / Receive Mechanism................196
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail

Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 328
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 329
Table of Contents
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications
(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................332
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................336
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Mechanism POP (APOP)
- Extended Feature ...............................336
9.16. SMTP Service Extension
for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT
Schematic Diagram ............................... 342

10.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................342
UF-9000
DP-180/190
1 Specifications Table
1.1.
Control Panel
<Navy Blue Control Panel>
For USA only

Panafax UF-9000
For Americas
WORKiO DP-190
For Euro and Other Destinations

WORKiO DP-180
9
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
For USA only

Panafax UF-9000
<Light Blue Control Panel>
UF-9000
DP-180/190
For Americas
WORKiO DP-190
For Euro and Other Destinations

WORKiO DP-180
Note:
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep
pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.
ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer
COPY SIZE
: Brighter
10
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.2.
Copy Function
Items
Basic Specifications
1 Type
2 Platen
3 Original Position
Platen
ADF
4 Recording Paper Path
5 Drum
6 Copy Process
7 Developing Process
8
9
10
11
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Toner Recycle
Fusing System
Max Original Size
Paper Size
Paper Tray
Bypass
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Desktop
Fixed
Left / Rear / Face Down
Left / Center / Face UP
Center
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
Electrostatic Indirect Laser
Mono Component Non Magnetic
Dry Toner
No
Heat & Pressure
Letter / A4 / Legal
Letter / Legal
A4 / A5
A4 / A5 / B5
Letter / Legal / Invoice
A4, FLS, A5
A4 / A5 / B5 / Postcard
12 Media Type
Standard Tray
Optional Tray
Bypass
13 Warm-up Time
Power Saver Mode
Sleep Mode
Shutdown Mode
Power On
Legal: with ADF only

For USA and Canada
For EU
For Other Destinations
For USA and Canada
For EU
FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in
Paper / Transparency
Paper
Paper / Transparency / Envelope /
Label / Thick Paper
68 F (20 C)
Approx. 15 sec
Approx. 18 sec
14 First Copy Time
Approx. 10 sec
15 Copy Speed
Letter
Approx. 19 cpm
A4
Remarks
Approx. 18 cpm
Scan: Platen; Size: Letter /

A4; Orientation: Portrait;
Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray;
Interval: From Pressing of
Start Key to paper exiting to
the Exit Tray; When LSU is
ready.
Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray;
Paper Exit: to Exit Tray;
Continuous Copy Mode.
11
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
16 Zoom
Enlargement
Reduction
Zoom
17 Paper Feed
Paper Tray
Capacity
Low Level Paper Warning
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Selected Original size / Copy size
Selected Original size / Copy size
50 - 200%
Front Loading Universal Paper Tray
250 sheets x 1
Yes
Remarks
1% Step
LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)

Orange Low Paper Level
Indicator
Bypass
Capacity
Paper Capacity
(Std. Configuration)
18 Multi Copy Range
19 Gradation
Text
Text / Photo
Photo
20 Resolution
Scan
Mono
Color
Print (Mono)
21 Scanning type
Color Scan
Color Depth
Mono Scan
Standard Sorting Memory
22
Size
23 Standard Page Memory Size
24 Exit Tray Capacity
1 sheet
Paper / Transparency /
Envelope / Label / Thick
Paper / Postcard etc.
250 sheets
999 sheets
Bi-Level
256 steps
256 steps
Halftone by Error Diffusion

Scanning and Printing.
Max. 600 x 600 dpi

Max. 300 x 300 dpi
Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi
Selectable 600 dpi, with

Smoothing, the results are
similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers
(1200 dpi Interpolated).
Yes
24 bit (16.7 Million colors)
Yes
16 MB
32 MB
150 sheets
LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)
18.2 x 19.9 x 20.6 in

(462 x 506 x 523 mm)
18.2 x 19.9 x 26.1 in
(462 x 506 x 663 mm)
With Optional 2nd Paper

Feed Module
25 Dimensions
(W x D x H)
26 Operating Space
(W x D)
27 Weight
18.2 x 21.1 x 31.5 in

(462 x 536 x 802 mm)
48.5 lb (22 kg)
12
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Options
1 Paper Feed System
550 sheets
2nd Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection
Low Level Paper Warning
Max. Paper Capacity
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Yes
Manual
Yes
800 sheets
Yes
5 Hard Disk Drive

6 Handset
7 PCL Printer
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 PS / PCL Printer
Yes
Auto Start
Normal Operation Mode
Remarks
550 sheets x 1
2 Sorting Image Memory

Optional Image Memory 1
(16 MB)
(64 MB)
(128 MB)
3 Image Memory
Expansion Flash Memory
Card, 4 MB
Card, 8 MB
4 Expansion Board
9 Accounting Software
10 Deluxe Stand
11 Remote Diagnostic Software
12 Mechanical Counter
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection
Auto Paper Selection
Copy
Print
Auto Paper Tray Selection
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Panel Selectable

Orange Low Paper Level
Indicator
LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)
(Tray 1 + 2)
Unit comes standard with
16 MB.
1-Slot available for an
Optional Image Memory
module.
Image Memory for Facsimile

Required for PCL and PS
Printing.
40 GB (2.5 inch)
Requires the Optional
Expansion Board.
Requires the Optional
Expansion Board.
For Accounting Function
Supplied as a Service Part.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
80 W
Reservation while Power On

Initializing
Turns On the Heater Power.
13
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Remarks
Energy Saver Mode
Power Saver Mode
Sleep Mode
Shutdown Mode
Transmission (ADF)
Transmission (Platen)
Reception / Copy
Max
Remote Diagnostic
Machine Stops when Out of
Toner
2 Additional Features
Low Level Paper indicator
Photo Mode
Original Detection Release
Edit / Effects
Book Mode
Edge Mode
Margin Mode
X-Y Zoom
Inverse Mode (Negative /
Positive)
Centering Mode
Mirror Mode
Image Repeat
20 W
12 W (100 VAC PS)

15 W (220 VAC PS)
1.5 W
Turns Off the Heater Power.

Automatically enters the
Sleep or Shutdown Mode
after 15 minutes from the
Standby or Energy Saver
Mode.
Manually enters the Energy
Saver Mode by pressing the
Energy Saver key.
Sleep or Shutdown mode is
controlled by the General
Functions setting.
Turns Off the Power of Printer
& Scanner.
USB / Network Function not
available
45 W (100 VAC PS)

56 W (220 VAC PS)
40 W (100 VAC PS)
50 W (220 VAC PS)
900 W (100 VAC PS)
1000 W (220 VAC PS)
900 W (100 VAC PS)
1000 W (220 VAC PS)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
256 steps
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
14
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Others (Inverting ADF &

ADU)
2-Page Copy Mode
2 in 1
4 in 1
Booklet Mode
Duplex Copy
12
21
22
Book2
Image Rotation (90 or 270 )
Electronic Sorting
Rotation Sorting
Insertion Job
Department Counter
ADF
Check / Slip Mode

(Double Exposure)
3 Control Panel
Display
Status Lamp
Remarks
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Mixed Size Original Feed

JOB Build and SADF
Mode
Original Counter
Job Memory
Job Time Display
Concurrent Copy
Tandem Copy Mode
Remote Copy Mode
Scan Once Print Many Mode
Job Completion Notice
Trial Copy Mode
Weekly Timer
Function Mode
Interrupt
Electronic Counter
Digital Sky Shot Mode
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Scanning twice by turning

original.
50 Departments
LTR and LGL, effective from
June 2004 Production
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes (1 jobs)
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCD
Yes
For Printer Mode only
Check : Dimensions of a Bank

check
Slip : Dimensions of a Bank
check with a
statement
20 digits x 2 lines
GREEN : Scanning /
Printing
RED
: Alarm / Warning
15
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Key
QWERTY Keyboard
Directory Search (4 way)
Original Size
Copy Size
Keypad
Clear
Stop
Start
Energy Saver
Sort / Finish
Function Mode
Original Detection
Release
Interrupt
Reset
One-Touch key
Mode Change
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Copier / Printer / NW Scanner

/ Fax and Internet Fax Mode
LCD Main Indication

Message Language
(Default)
Original Size / Image
Indication
Paper Size / Image
Indication
Paper Tray Selection
Selected Paper Tray /
Tray Status
Original Mode Selection
Copy Density Selection
Setting Confirmation
Function Classification
Zoom Magnification
Number of Copies
Error Code
Finishing
English (American)
Specified Language
For USA and Canada

For EU and Other
Destinations
Yes
(without Image)
Yes
(without Image)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Text / Text-Photo / Photo

5 steps
16
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Warning Indicators
No Toner
No Paper
Add Paper Indication
Paper Jam Indication
Paper Jam Location
Service Alert Call
User Error
Machine Error
History of Jam Errors
4 Main Unit
Total Counter
Electronic
Mechanical
Max. Weight of Documents
on the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide
Clip Pocket
Operating Instructions
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label
5 Optical System
Original Size Detection
Scanning Method
Dehumidifier
6 Process System / Yield
Toner Cartridge
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Optional)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
Mechanical Indicator
Mechanical Counter
6.61 lb (3 kg)
Yes
No
No
Specified Language
No
600 dpi CCD
No
UG-5530 / DQ-UG16H / UG17H [Yield: 5 K (5% coverage), 6 K Max]
Average yield is based on 5% coverage of the printable area with
repetitive printing of 10 pages (Letter/A4 size, single side printing,
default density). The yield of a Toner Cartridge varies depending on the
coverage, temperature, humidity, media, etc. Therefore, the average
yield cannot be guaranteed. Continuously printing 10% coverage of
printable area will reduce the yield of the Toner Cartridge to about half
as compared to 5% coverage printing. The maximum yield of the Toner
Cartridge will not exceed 6,000 pages by way of Digital Counter.
UG-5540 [Yield: 10 K (3% coverage), 11.5 K Max]
DQ-UG26H/UG27H [Yield: 6K (5% coverage), 11.5 K Max]
The maximum yield of the Toner Cartridge will not exceed 11,500
pages by way of Digital Counter.
(See sect.1.5.)
17
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Efficiency
1 Productivity
ADF Through-put Speed
ADU Copy Productivity
(LTR / A4)
12
10 copies
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM
Minor PM (Cleaning)
2 Average Copy Volume
3 Max. Copy Volume
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension
2 Packing Weight
3 Accessories
Process Unit
Power Supply
1 Power Requirement
2 Power Consumption
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature
2 Relative Humidity
3 Safety
4 Energy Saver
5 EMI
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Copy Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Remarks
Approx. 50%
More than 50%
85 K (Printer), 50K (ADF)

10 K (ADF)
1.5 K
10 K
Throughput when the LSU is

ready; Paper is fed from the
1st Paper Tray and is ejected
to the Exit Tray.
Refer to Section 3.4

Monthly
24.3 x 29.3 x 26.4 in

(616 x 745 x 670 mm)
63.9 lb (29 kg)
Yes
Yes
99 - 132 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
Max. 900W
50 - 80 F / 10 - 30 C
30 - 80%RH
UL60950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.60950-1
EN60950-1
Energy Star Compliant
Class B computing device peripheral
in FCC Rules Part 15
This Product uses Lead Free (PbF)
PCBs
120 VAC
220 - 240 VAC
For USA and Canada

For EU and
Other Destinations
For USA and Canada
Refer to the inner Front Cover
and the Parts Manual for
details
18
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.3.
1.3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions

Fax Function
Items
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility
2 PSTN Line Port
3 Leased Line Port
4 V.24 Line Port
5 Modem Speed
6 Coding Scheme
7 ECM
Fax Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Super G3 / G3
Yes
No
No
33.6 - 2.4kbps
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Yes
Yes (B, D)
LTR : Approx. 2.7 sec
9 Transmission Speed
A4 : Approx. 2.9 sec
Transmission
Std.
: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
Communication Resolution
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
10 dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
Reception
mm)
Std.
: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device
CCD (ADF / Platen)
Scanning Resolution /
2
Speed
Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
mm)
Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/
LTR : 2.7 sec
LTR : 2.7 sec
mm)
A4 : 2.9 sec
S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x
15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x
lines/mm)
600dpi: 600 x 600
Legal
3 Document Size (Max.)
216 x 2000 mm
Remarks
ITU-T Std & Non-Std
1-Line only
T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter
Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30
ECM
8 Short Protocol
4 Effective Scanning Width

5 ADF Capacity
LTR : 8.3 in (212 mm)

A4 : 8.2 in (207 mm)
50 sheets
ITU-T Image No. 1

(A4, Std Resolution)
600 dpi communication is

only possible between T.30
Compliant Panafax,
WORKiO, and other T.30
compliant machines.
Excludes: Initializing Time,

ADF slipping factor, and Data
XMT Time.
(Letter size for USA and
Canada; A4 size for Other
Destinations)
Using ADF only

(Letter size for USA and
Canada; A4 size for Other
Destinations)
Face Up, top feed
LTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m2)
19
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
6 Collation Stack
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method
2 Recording Speed
3 Recording Resolution Fax
4 Recording Paper Size
5 Effective Printing Width
6 Recording Paper Capacity

7 Collation Stack
8 Consumable
Fax Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Yes
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
Face Down
LP
Approx. 19 ppm
Recording Speed attained

after the 1st copy.
600 x 600 dpi

Legal / Letter
Legal / Letter
Invoice: Not supported.
A4 / A5
LTR : 8.1 in
LTR : 8.1 in
(207mm) Letter : USA and Canada
A4
: Other Destinations
(207mm)
A4 : 7.9 in
(201 mm)
Tray 1 + 2 : Max. 800 sheets
250 sheets
LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Yes
Face Down
All in One
Drum Unit
Cartridge
and Toner
Fax Memory
1 Standard Memory
2 MB
2 Optional Memory
4 MB
8 MB
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation
2 Direct XMT Reserve
3 Memory XMT Reserve
Number of Memory Job
4
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
1 One-Touch Keys
2 One-Touch / Program Keys
3 One-Touch Auto Dialers
4 Abbr. Auto Dialers
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image

No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)
Card, using ITU-T Image
No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Max. 50 files
32
8
40
160
5 Total Auto Dialers
200
6 Directory Search Dialing

7 Program Dials
8 Max. Tel Number Digits
Max. Station Name
9
Characters
Full Number Dialing
10
(Buffered Dialing)
Direct Dialing
11
(Monitor Dialing)
Yes
8
36
Plus an additional 800

stations available to select
from, when the optional Hard
Disk Drive is installed.
15
Yes
Max. 50 stations
Yes
Voice mode
20
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Fax Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
12 Automatic Redialing
Yes
13 Manual Redialing
Yes
14 Line Monitor Speaker

15 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)
16 Pulse / Tone Dialing
17 Pulse to Tone Change
18 Flash Key
19 Handset
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission
2 Memory Transmission
Quick Memory
3
Transmission
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Multi-Station Transmission
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
Transmission
Deferred Transmission
Deferred Multi-Station
Transmission
Priority Direct Transmission
Priority Memory
Transmission
Batch Transmission
90 Degree Rotation
Transmission
Cover Sheet
Confidential Mail Box
Multi-Copy Transmission
15 Memory Back-Up
16 Duplex Scanning
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Option
Yes
Yes
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min.
intervals
Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE
button
In Monitor Dialing mode only
10 pps / DTMF
Page Retransmission
Yes
Yes
Max. 250 stations

(200 One-Touch / Abbr. + 50
Full Number Dialing)
No
ADF Deferred Transmission
Yes
Max. 50 timers
Yes
Yes
Priority ADF Transmission
No
Yes
Real Time (up to 5 Files)
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
FAX: Back-up with Flash

Memory.
Copy / Printer: No Back-up
with D-RAM
No
Yes
2 Fixed Reduction
Yes
3 Auto Reduction
Yes
4 Overlap Printing
Yes
5 Receive to Memory
Yes
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps), Top & Left
Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps), Top & Left
Alignment
Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13
mm)
21
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Distinctive Ring Detector
(DRD)
90 Degree Rotation
7
Reception
8 Duplex Printing
Polling
1 Polling
2 Turnaround Polling
3 Multi-Station Polling
4 Deferred Polling
Deferred Multi-Station
5
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx
7 Memory Polling Tx
8 Preset Polling Password
Temporary Polling
9
Password
10 Continuous Polling
Convenience
1 Panel Display
2 Voice Contact
3 Edit File Mode
4 Incomplete File Save
5 Automatic Cover Sheet
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp
2 Header / Total Page Print
6
3 Transaction Journal
4 Comm. Journal
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal
Printout Lists
1 One-Touch List
2 ABBR. No. List
3 Program List
4 Address Book Search List
5 Fax Parameter List
6 File List
7 Ind. XMT Journal
8 Directory Sheet
Identifications
1 Logo
2 Multiple Logo
3 Character ID
4 Numeric ID
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fax Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Yes
Remarks
Specified Destinations only
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max. 250 stations

Max. 50 timers
Yes
Max. 50 timers / 250 stations
No
Yes
Yes
1 File
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
With View Mode

With View Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
200 Transactions / with View

Mode
With Image Data
Auto Dialer List

With View Mode
25 Characters
16 Characters
20 Digits
22
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV
2 Selective Reception
3 Relay XMT Request
4 Relay XMT Center
5 Confidential XMT / Polling
6 Confidential Center
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling
8 Mailbox Center
9 File XMT
10 Received Fax Forward
11 Sub-address XMT
12 Sub-address Auto Routing
13 NYSE
14 Internet Fax Relay XMT
15 Email Relay XMT
16 Panafax Desktop
Standards
1 PSTN
Others
1 Fax Access Code
2 PIN Code Access
3 Intelligent Redial (AI)
4 Department Code
5 Power Saver Mode
6 Self Diagnostic Function
Remote Diagnostic
7
Function
8 Check & Call Function
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fax Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FCC Part 68 / Industry Canada
No. CS-03: Issue 8
TBR21
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remarks
TSI Check
Max.10 Mail Boxes

Received File Transfer
T. Routing
For USA and Canada only
iFAX iFAX G3FAX
PC iFAX G3FAX
For USA and Canada

For EU

5 Files
50 Departmental Codes
Specific Destinations only
Yes
No
23
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.3.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Printer Function
Items
Printer Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
No
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Printer Function
1 Printing Size
2 Bypass
3 Stapling
Ethernet 10Base-T/100BaseTX
USB1.1
Firewire
Yes
Yes
No
LGL / LTR
LGL / LTR /
A4 / A5 / B5
Yes
No
4 Printing Resolution (dpi)
Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi
5 Interface
USB / Ethernet
Win 98 / Win Me / Win NT 4.0 /
Win 2000 / Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.1
20 MB
Yes
6 OS
7 Printer Work Memory Size
8 GDI
Remarks
9 PDL (PCL6)
Yes
10 PDL (PS3)
Yes
11 Duplex Printing
Yes
12 Collation Stack
13 Status Monitor
Network
USB
14 Network Status Monitor
15 Smoothing
16 Applicable PC
17 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV into
Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory while
Printing
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC
Selectable 600 dpi, with

Smoothing, the results are
similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers
(1200 dpi Interpolated).
MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only.
Not expandable
Requires Optional PS / PCL6
Emulation Kit and Optional
Expansion Board.
Emulation Kit and Optional
Expansion Board.
Custom Size/Postcard Size is
not available.
MAC is PS only.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
24
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
18
Output to separate tray for

Printing, Fax, Copy
Printer Function
Description
UF-9000
DP-180 / 190
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
No
19 Font
Yes
20 Mailbox
Yes
21 Secure Mailbox
Yes
Requires Optional PCL6 or

PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit
Requires Optional HDD Unit.
Max. 100 Users.
Max. 20 mailboxes for each
User ID
Requires Optional HDD Unit.
Max. 100 Users.
Max. 20 mailboxes for each
User ID
25
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.3.3.
Network Scanner Function
Items
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device
2 Scanning Speed (ADF)
Mono
Color
3 Halftone
4 Max. Document Size
5
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Scanning Resolution
(dpi)
Mono
Color
6 OS
7 2-Sided Scanning
8 File Format
Mono
Color
9 Completion Notice
10 Protocol
Network Address Features
Network Scanner Function

Description
UF-9000 / DP-180/190
No
Yes
No
No
Remarks
Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Firewire
CCD (ADF / Platen)

LTR: 2.7 sec
A4 : 2.9 sec
LTR: 11 sec
A4 : 12 sec
256 Halftone shades,
Color 24bit, 16670 K
Legal
216 x 2000 mm
600 x 600
300 x 300
150 x 150
300 x 300
150 x 150
75 x 75
Win 98 / Me /
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
No
Multi-page TIFF / PDF
JPEG / PDF
Yes
TCP/IP / Non-Std
1 One Touch Address Keys
40
2 Abbr. Address Numbers
60
600 dpi
(Data XMT time is not included.)
300 dpi
(Data XMT time is not included.)
With Error Diffusion
Using ADF only
Default: 300 dpi

Default: 150 dpi
Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen
Shared with Fax/I-Fax One-Touch

Address, 40 in Total
Independent for Network Scanner
26
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.3.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Internet Fax Function
Items
Main Specifications
1 Communication Protocols
2 Max. Modem Speed
3 Coding Scheme
4 File Format

Description
UF-9000 / DP-180/190
SMTP / POP3 / MIME
NA
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
TIFF / JPEG or PDF
5 Line Interface
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size
2 Effective Scanning Width
Scanning Resolution
dpi x lpi (pel/mm x lines/mm)
RJ-45
Legal
216 x 2000 mm
LTR
: 8.3 in (212 mm)
A4
: 8.2 in (207 mm)
Std
: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
: 406 x 391
(16 x 15.4)
600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution
2 Effective Recording Width
Remarks
LTR
A4
Selectable
(PDF & JPEG formats are used for
Scan-to-Email, current I-Fax standards
do not support these file formats)
Ethernet LAN
With the ADF only
Letter size: for USA and Canada
A4 size : for Other Destinations
LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning
Resolution is available.
600 dpi
: 8.1 in (207 mm)
: 7.9 in (201 mm)
Transmission Features
1 Multi-Task Operation
Yes
2 Memory Transmission
Sequential Multi-Station
3
Transmission
Yes
Simultaneous Multi-Station
Transmission
5 Sender Selection
G3 / Email Mixed
6
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission
8 Fax Forward
9 Sub-address RCV
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print Selection
Subject Line
Convenient simultaneous G3 Fax and

LAN operation.
Yes
Yes
Max. 250 stations

(200 One-Touch / Abbr. + 50 Full
Number Dialing)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Random Entry
Received File Transfer

Inbound Routing
All or From / To / Subject only
27
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items
LAN Features
1 Internet Fax Communication
2 Internet Mail Reception
3 Internet Fax Server Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT
Email Relay XMT
Received Fax / Email
Forward
PC FAX Transmission
Inbound Routing
4
5
6
7
Phone Book Registration from

PC
I-Fax Parameters
Registration via Email
Internet Delivery Confirmation
Network Scanning
Network Printing
LPR / LPD
GDI
PDL
8 DHCP Client
9 LDAP
10 TIFF Viewer
11 NYSE
Certainty
1 Comm. Journal (w / Image)
ID
1 Email Address
UF-9000
DP-180/190

Description
UF-9000 / DP-180/190
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
iFAX iFAX G3FAX

PC iFAX G3FAX
Yes
Local print available
Yes
Panafax Desktop Only (Network)

Using Sub-Address.
Local print available
Yes
Yes
Via Email or Network Address Editor
Yes
Yes
Yes
With MDN
600 dpi
Yes
Yes
600 dpi
600 dpi
Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion
Board.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Yes
Yes
28
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
System Combination
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Scanner Unit (SPC PC Board)
Panel
PCL6
Emulation Option
Super G3 Fax
Communication
Mechanical
Counter Option
PS/PCL6
Emulation Option
GDI Printer
Handset Kit
Option
Hard Disk
Drive Option
(PNL PC Board)
Main PC Board
Automatic
Duplex Unit
Program
Expansion Board
8MB
Expansion Flash
Memory Card
4 or 8MB
Accounting
Software Option
Network
Scanner
Internet Fax/
E-Mail
USB
Interface
Electronic Sorting Memory
10/100 Ethernet
Interface
Image Memory
16, 64 or 128MB
(1-Slot)
2nd Paper Feed Module Option
Standard Configuration
Option
29
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Options List
Options
Option Name
Multi Page Description Language

Controller Module (PCL6/PostScript 3*)
Option Number
DA-PC188
DA-PC190
DA-MC188
DA-MC190
Hard Disk Drive Unit
DA-HD19
Expansion Board
DA-EM600
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB

Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB
Image Memory (16 MB)
Accounting Software
UE-410047
UE-410048
DA-SM16B
DA-SM64B
DA-SM28B
DA-WA10
DA-DS188
UE-403171
Printer Controller Module (PCL6*)
Handset Kit
Deluxe Stand
Mechanical Counter
UE-403172
DA1D190
DZTQ000066
Remarks
For DP-180/190
For UF-9000
For DP-180/190
For UF-9000
Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory
(Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard
Disk Drive to function.
(PS additional fonts, Mail Box, additional
800 addresses, etc.)
F-ROM Board (8 MB) is required for PCL
or PS printing.
Additional Memory for Fax / I-Fax
For Electronic Sorting
For Accounting Function
For USA and Canada
Available in Specified Destinations
Supplied as a Service Part.
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PostScript 3 (PS3) is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
The Part Name(s) / Part Number(s) differ depending on the Models and the Destinations.
30
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Supplies
UF-9000
Part Name
Part Number
UG-5530
Toner Cartridge
(All in One Cartridge) UG-5540*
Color of Control Panel

Current Light Blue
Current Light Blue
Navy Blue Control Panel
Remarks
5K (5% coverage), 6K Max
10K (3% coverage), 11.5K Max
Note:
1. UG-5530 cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix CF [March
2006] and above for USA/Canada.
2. The UG-5540 can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix BF
[February 2006] and below for USA/Canada however, the yield will be the same as for the UG-5530
(6K Max).
.
DP-190
Part Name
Toner
Part Number
DQ-UG17H
DQ-UG27H*
Drum Unit
DQ-UH35H

Current Light Blue
Current Light Blue
-
Remarks

Current Light Blue
Current Light Blue
-
Remarks
DP-180
Part Name
Toner
Drum Unit
Part Number
DQ-UG16H
DQ-UG26H*
DQ-UH34H
Note:
1. DQ-UG16H / 17H cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix
CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations).
2. The DQ-UG26H / 27H can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix
BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations), however, the yield
will be the same as the DQ-UG16H / 17H (6K Max).
New Navy Blue Color
Light Blue Color
31
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
External View
1. Standard Configuration
(For USA Only)
Complies with FDA radiation
performance standards, 21 CFR
Subchapter J
Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID
Top View
19.89 in (505 mm)
20.57 in (522 mm)
16.65 in (423 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
17.72 in (450 mm)
Left View
17.65 in (448 mm)
Right View
Front View
Rear View
CAUTION
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS
PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
"IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN
INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL
SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS"
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
32
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2. With Optional 2nd Paper Feed Module Configuration
19.89 in (505 mm)
5.59 in (142 mm)

26.09 in (662 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
17.65 in (448 mm)
17.72 in (450 mm)
33
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3. Space Requirements
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
19.92 in (506 mm)
42.36 in (1076 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
14.57 in (370 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
26.06 in (662 mm)
4.33 in (110 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
19.92 in (506 mm)
42.36 in (1076 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
Main Unit + Handset Option
14.57 in (370 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
30.39 in (772 mm)
34
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.6.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:

1
10
11
Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number
00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units
A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters I and O are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters I and O)
For Example:
3QY = UF-9000-AU
3RA = DP-180-PB
3QZ = DP-190-PU
Production Facility
Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
01 (2001)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 (2010)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11 (2011)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 (2020)
G
H
I
J
K
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
July
August
September
October
November
December
Production Month
A
B
C
D
E
F
:
:
:
:
:
:
January
February
March
April
May
June
35
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1.7.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan
ADF Motor
ADF Cover Interlock Switch
OPC Drum Unit Interlock Switch

Scanner Motor
Front Cover Safety Interlock Switch
Main Motor
Motor Fan
Main Switch
2nd Paper Feed Motor

Registration Solenoid
Clutch
Pick Up Solenoid
1.8.
Sensors and PC Boards

ADF PCB
Document Sensor
Read Point Sensor
SPC PCB
PNL1 PCB
Home Detect Sensor
PNL3 PCB
PNL5 PCB
PNL4 PCB
PNL2 PCB
Paper Exit/ADU
Paper Jam Sensor
SRU PCB
FXB PCB
Expansion Flash Memory Card
2nd Paper Feed Module I/F PCB
DC PCB
SC PCB
Paper Path Sensor
SDRM PC Board
Program Expansion Board
No Paper Sensor
Engine Control PCB
2nd Feeder PCB

Registration Sensor
No Paper Sensor
Toner Sensor
36
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1.
General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
37
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.2.1.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Disassembly Instructions
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Unit
Stamp Head (553)
(1) Open the ADF.

(2) Detach the left side of the Scanning Pad (404).
(3) Open the Stamp Cover.
(4) Remove the Stamp Head (553).
Note:
When closing the Stamp Cover, close gently by
pressing both latches.
2.2.1.2.
ADF Roller (417), Pick Up Roller (414), Separation Rubber (547)

(1) Open the ADF Cover.
(2) Remove the Pick Up Sheet Assembly.
38
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove 2 Snap Rivets (551).

(4) Remove the Separator Assembly.
(5) Remove the Separation Rubber (547).

Note:
When reinstalling, ensure that the embossed "R" is
facing downward.
(6) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).

(7) Close the ADF Cover.
(8) Remove the ADF Cover (401).
39
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Tension Spring (426).

(10) Remove 1 Screw (V7).
(11) Remove the ADF Roller Fix Plate (409).
(12) Lift the ADF Cover Base.

(13) Remove the ADF Roller Assembly as
illustrated.
Note:
When reinstalling, ensure that the ADF Roller
Assembly is connected with 2 Document Stoppers
correctly. (ex. When the Pick Up Roller goes down,
2 Document Stoppers rise up.)
(14) Remove the ADF Shaft (418).

(15) Remove the ADF Roller (417).
40
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(16) Remove the Stopper Arm (413).

(17) Remove 2 E-Ring (447).
(18) Remove the Pick Up Shaft (415).
(19) Remove the Pick Up Roller (414).
41
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.1.3.
ADF PC Board (1911), ADF Motor (541)
UF-9000
DP-180/190

(2) Remove 1 Silver Screw (H8).
(3) Open the ADF.

(4) Release 4 Latch Hooks.
(5) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (402).
(6) Disconnect all the Harnesses on ADF PC

Board.
(7) Remove 2 Screws (V7) and 1 Screw (V9).
(8) Remove the ADF PC Board (1911).
42
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Paper Transport Knob (525).

(10) Remove 2 Screws (H8).
(11) Remove the Document Guide (429).
(12) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.)

(14) Release the Ferrite Core from the Latch Hook.

(15) Remove 2 Screws (V9).
(16) Remove the ADF Motor (541).
43
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.1.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Feed Roller (516)
(1) Remove the Document Guide.

(Refer to 2.2.1.3.)
(2) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.)
(4) Remove the front Pin (425).
(5) Remove the rear Pin (425).
(6) Remove the Upper ADF Feed Unit.

(7) Remove the Wire Clamp.
(9) Remove the Motor Attachment Plate.
(10) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board
(PA05).
(11) Remove the ADF Feed Unit.
(12) Remove 5 Gears.

(14) Remove the Rear Attachment Plate.
44
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

(16) Remove the Front Attachment Plate.

(18) Remove the Frame Cover.
(19) Remove 2 D6 Bushings (537).

(20) Remove the Feed Roller (516).
2.2.1.5.
Cleaning ADF Roller, Pick Up Roller, Separation Rubber and Feed Roller
(2) Clean the ADF Roller (417), Pick Up Roller
(414) and Separation Rubber (547) with a soft
cloth, saturated with water.
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft
cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
45
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Clean the Feed Roller (516) with a soft cloth,

saturated with water by turning Paper Transport
Knob.
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft
cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
46
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.2.
2.2.2.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Control Panel Unit
Battery (128), PNL1 PC Board (1905), PNL2 PC Board (1906), PNL3 PC Board
(1907), PNL5 PC Board (1909), PNL4 PC Board (1908), LCD Module (127)
<Replace the Battery>
(2) Remove the Battery Holder (102).
(3) Replace the Battery (128).

Note:
Ensure that the battery is installed with correct
polarity.
(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder (102) and the
Screw (V6).
<Control Panel>
(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.
(7) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.
47
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(8) Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC

Board as illustrated.
(9) Remove 2 Screws (F10).
(10) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1905).
(11) Remove the Panel Base (101).
(12) Remove the PNL4 PC Board (1908).

(14) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (1906).
48
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(15) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on PNL 2 PC Board.


(20) Remove the LCD Holder (122).
49
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(21) Remove the LCD Module (127).
50
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.3.
2.2.3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Scanner Unit
Scanning Lamp (303), SPC PC Board (1910)
(1) Remove the ADF Rear Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.3.)

(3) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board
(PA04).
(4) Open the ADF.

(5) Release the Latch of the Left Hinge with a small
Straight Edge Screwdriver and remove the ADF.
(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.

(Refer to 2.2.2.1.)
(8) Remove the Wire Clamp.
(9) Remove the Scanner Cover Assembly (219).
(10) Disconnect the Harness.

(11) Remove 2 Screws (W8).
(12) Remove the Scanning Lamp (303).
(13) Slide the CCD Unit.
Note:
The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190
only.
51
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(14) Remove the CCD Harness Seal (213).

(16) Remove the Seal Plate (227).
(17) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1922).
Note:
There is no need to disconnect the front FG
Harness that is attached to the CCD Unit.
Note:
The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190
only.
(18) Remove 3 Screws (V7) and 2 Screws (H8).
(19) Remove the Main Board Cover (216).
(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses.

(22) Remove SPC PC Board (1910).
52
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.4.
2.2.4.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Cover Assembly
Front Cover (601), Rear Door (612)
(1) Open the Front Cover.

(2) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Front
Cover (601).
(3) Open the Rear Door.

(4) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Rear
Door (612).
2.2.4.2.
Right Cover (615), Left Cover (616), Rear Cover (617)

(1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.

(3) Remove the Right Side Cover.
53
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness (631).

(5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.

(7) Remove the Left Side Cover (616).

(9) Remove the Rear Cover (617).
54
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.5.
2.2.5.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PC Board
SC PC Board (1901), FXB PC Board (1903), CTRL PC Board (1902)
(1) Remove the Right Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)

(2) Remove 7 Screws (U1).
(3) Remove the SC Cover (701).
(5) Remove the PCB Cover (620).
(6) Remove 1 Screw (U1).

(7) Remove the Spring Plate (705).
(8) Unlock the Harness Clamp fastening the USB

Cable.
(9) Disconnect the USB Cable (1923) on the SC PC
Board (CN305).
(10) Release the USB Cable from the Harness
Clamp.
(11) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC

Board.
(13) Remove the SC PC Board (1901).
55
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the FXB PC

Board.
(16) Remove the FXB PC Board (1903).
(17) Release the Harnesses from the Harness

Clamp.
(18) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9).
(19) Remove the SC Base Bracket (702).
(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the Engine

Control PC Board.
(22) Remove the Engine Control PC Board (1902).
2.2.5.2.
HVPS (1005), LVPS Unit (1021)

(1) Remove the Left Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)
(2) Remove 3 Screws (T9).
(3) Remove the HVPS Insulation Sheet (1020).
56
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(4) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U3).

(5) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1917).
(6) Release the Latch Hook and remove the HVPS
(1005).
(7) Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS.
(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (1219 and 1930) on

the LVPS Unit.
(9) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U1).
(10) Remove the LVPS Unit.

(12) Remove 2 Brackets.
57
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Drive Unit
(1) Remove the SC Base Bracket. (Refer to

2.2.5.1.)
(2) Disconnect the Harnesses on the Engine
Control PC Board (CN004, CN011, CN012,
CN016 and CN019).
(3) Release the Harnesses from the Harness
Clamps.
(4) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9).

(5) Remove the Solenoid Assembly.

(8) Remove the Drive Assembly.

(11) Remove the Motor (907).
58
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.7.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
LSU Unit
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)

(2) Remove the Right Cover, Left Cover and Rear
Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.)
(3) Remove the SC Cover and disconnect the USB
Cable. (Refer to 2.2.5.1.)
(4) Release 2 Harnesses from 2 Harness Clamps.
(5) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the SC PC Board
(CN304 and CN306).
(6) Remove 6 Screws (Y11).

(7) Remove the Scanner Unit.

(9) Remove the Top Cover (623).
(10) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

(12) Remove the LSU Unit (1114).
59
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.8.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fuser Unit
CAUTION:
To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is
hot.
(1) Remove the Rear Door. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.)
(2) Remove the Scanner Unit and Upper Cover.
(Refer to 2.2.7.)
(3) Disconnect 2 Harnesses by pressing down on
the connector latches with a small screw driver.

(5) Remove the Upper Exit Roller Holder (1101).
(6) Disconnect the Harness (1219) on the LVPS

Unit.
(7) Remove the Ferrite Core (1115).
(8) Remove 4 Screws (U4) and 1 Screw (U1).

(9) Remove the Fuser Unit.
60
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

(11) Remove the Side Fuser Cover (1226).
(13) Remove the Left Fuser Cover (1224).
(14) Remove 2 Black Screws (U5).

(15) Separate the Upper Fuser Unit.
(16) Remove the Pressure Roller (1205).

Caution:
Exercise caution not to bend the Fuser Lamp
Terminal.
(18) Remove the Halogen Lamp (1209).
Note:
Do not Touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp
with bare hands. Grease from finger prints will
shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean
finger prints.
61
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(19) Shift the Fuser Roller and remove the Left Heat
Roller Bushing (1206).
(20) Remove the Heat Roller (1205).
(21) Remove the Heat Roller Gear (1208) and the
Right Heat Roller Bushing (1207).

(23) Remove 2 Thermostats (1204).
(24) Remove 1 Screw (U4).

(25) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1229).
(26) Remove 4 Springs (1223).

(28) Remove 4 Separator Plates (1222).
(29) Remove 4 Separators (1225).
62
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.9.
2.2.9.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Paper Feed Module

Pick Up Roller (1316) and Separator Pad (1615)
(1) Pull the Paper Tray out.
(2) Remove the Separator Pad (1625).

(4) Remove the Pick Up Roller Assembly.
2.2.9.2.
Registration Roller (1303) and Paper Feed Roller (1305)

(2) Remove the Toner Cartridge.
(3) Remove the Solenoid Assembly. (Refer to
2.2.6.)
(4) Remove the Registration Gear (1304) and
Drive Wheel (1308).
(5) Remove 2 Bushings (1309).
(6) Remove the Registration Roller (1303) and
Paper Feed Roller (1305).
63
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.10. Bias Transfer Roller (1503)

(2) Remove the Cartridge Unit.
(3) Remove 2 Transfer Roller Holder (1501).
(4) Remove the Bias Transfer Roller Assembly.
(5) Remove the Spacer (811).

(6) Remove the Transfer Gear (1505).
(7) Remove 2 Bushings (1504).
(8) Remove 2 Spacer (811).
64
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.2.11.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
ADU
(1) Remove the Scanner Unit. (Refer to 2.2.7.)

(2) Slide the Paper Tray out.
(3) Turn the Unit upside down.
(5) Remove the Lower Base Plate (1401).

(7) Remove the Plate.
(9) Remove the ADU Unit.
(10) Remove the E-Ring (U6).

(11) Remove the A/D Unit Join Gear (1411).
(12) Remove the ADU Registration Roller shaft
(1409).
(13) Disconnect the Harness on the Registration /

Paper Path Sensor PC Board.
(14) Remove 1 Screw (T9).
(15) Release the Latch Hook and remove the
Registration / Paper Detect Sensor PC Board
(1938).
65
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.12. 2nd Paper Feed Module

2.2.12.1. Pick Up Roller (1733), Separator Pad (1812), 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945)
(1) Separate the 2nd Paper Feed Module from the

Unit.
(3) Remove the Top Cover Assembly (1730).

(5) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Right
Cover.

(7) Remove the Clutch (1734).

(9) Remove the 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945).
66
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

(11) Remove the Bearing (1715).
(12) Shift the Shaft and remove the Pick Up Roller
(1733).
(13) Remove the Paper Tray.

(14) Remove the Separator Pad (1824).
67
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2.2.13. Toner Cartridge
2.2.13.1. Cleaning Paper Feed Roller (1305), Registration Roller (1303), Paper Chute and
Dust Scraper Assembly (1315)
(2) Remove the Toner Cartridge.
(3) Wipe the Paper Feed Roller (A: 1305),

Registration Roller (B: 1303) and Paper Chute
(C) with a soft cloth that has been moistened
with water.
Note:
1. Ensure to clean up all the paper dust.
2. Paper Feed Roller (A) can be rotated half way,
Registration Roller (B) can be rotated in the
direction of the arrow. Exercise care not to
damage the Sheets (D) in front of the
Registration Roller (B).
(4) Open the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover
(1315).
(5) Clean the inside with the vacuum cleaner.
(6) Close the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover.
Note:
Ensure that the cover is firmly closed as it may
damage the OPC Drum.
68
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
2.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Hardware Identification Template

Ref. No.
Part No.
19
XTB3+8J
Screw
447
21070121706
E-Ring
XYN3+F5FJ
Screw
XYN3+F5
Screw (See Note)
XTB3+8G
Screw
XWC3BFJ
Washer, Star
XWC3B
Washer, Star (See Note)
H8
XTW3+8LFN
Screw
L9
XTB3+4F
Screw
P3
XTW3+8L
Screw
P8
XTW3+8P
Screw
T8
XTW26+8S
Screw
XTW3+8SFJ
Screw
XTW3+8S
Screw (See Note)
XTW3+6LFJ
Screw
XTW3+6L
Screw (See Note)
U3
XYC3+FF8C
Screw
U4
XTW3+12S
Screw
U5
XTW3+12SFZ
Screw
U6
XUC4VW-V
E-Ring
U7
PJNEB0003Y
Screw
U8
XTW3+U8S
Screw
3F
F10
G8
T9
U1
Figure
Remark
69
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Ref. No.
Part No.
U9
XSN3+4
Screw
XYC3+FF6FJ
Screw
XYC3+FF6
Screw (See Note)
V2
XTW3+6S
Screw
V3
XWE4
Washer
V5
XTW3+6LFC
Screw
V6
XTB3+8JFN
Screw
V7
XTW3+8PFN
Screw
V8
XTW4+16PFN
Screw
V9
XTW3+6LFN
Screw
W1
XTS3+8J
Screw
W2
DZZSP29011
Screw
W4
XTB2+12J
Screw
W5
XSN2+10FN
Screw
W7
PJNAC0003Z
Screw
W8
XTN3+8JFN
Screw
Y11
XTW4+8LFN
Screw
V1
Figure
Remark
70
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine
cleaning and parts replacement.
It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals
for customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
- You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts and
packaging in accordance with local regulations and clean the surrounding
area.
- Before servicing the equipment, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves
and eye protection.
1
Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive
Maintenance Check List (refer to 3.4) in the service manual.
Cleaning the Rollers

- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.
Disassembly and Adjustment Precautions

CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF
position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet
before disassembling the machine. (During a Lightning Storm, to
prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first
before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful and avoid clothing
from being caught by moving components.
- While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect the
connectors on any PC Board.
- Ensure to use correct screws.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical
continuity.
- To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
71
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Laser Handling Precautions

The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by
a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not
stray or leak during photocopying operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective
properties into the laser's path.
2. .Before servicing the machine, remove watches, rings, or other metallic
objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser
striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)
Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum
safety, please follow the above precautions.
72
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Required Tools
No.
Tools
1 Soft Cloth
2 Isopropyl Alcohol
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
4
Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in)
Tweezer
3.2.1.
Preventive Maintenance Method
Memory Data
Important
Action
Check
Auto Document
Feeder (ADF)
Check &
Clean
Scanner Unit
Transmitter Unit
Mirrors
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Inspection Items
Gears, Rollers Shafts Check &

Grease
Timing Belts
Check &
Clean
No.
No.
Tools
7 Pliers
8 Cotton Swab
9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
Part Description
Check
Comments
1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Wet soft
cloth (Water).
Note:
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with
a soft cloth saturated with water.
1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with
Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
2. Clean the Rollers with Wet soft cloth (Water).
1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your bare
hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth,
saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol.
1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
1. Check for belt looseness or abrasion.
2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
73
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Preventive Maintenance Points
74
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Preventive Maintenance Check List
The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The list is for an average usage of 50
transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and actual use
will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only.
No.
Preventive
Maintenance
Parts
ADF Unit
1 Separation Rubber
2 Pick Up Roller
3 ADF Roller
4 Feed Roller
Paper Feed Module
5 Pick Up Roller
6 Separator Pad
Bias Transfer Roller
7
(BTR)
8 Pick Up Roller
9 Separator Pad
Fuser Unit
10 Fuser Unit
Ref.
No.
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
Replacement/Adjustment
Cycle
Procedure
(Sheet)
547
414
417
516
10K
10K
10K
10K
Wet soft cloth

Wet soft cloth
Wet soft cloth
Wet soft cloth
50K
100K
100K
100K
Refer to
2.2.1.
1316
1625
10K
10K
Wet soft cloth

Wet soft cloth
85K
85K
Refer to
2.2.9.
Ref.
Counter
F7-08
F7-12
1503
10K
Dry soft cloth
85K
Refer to
2.2.10.
1733
1824
10K
10K
Wet soft cloth

Wet soft cloth
85K
85K
Refer to
2.2.12.
F7-13
85K
Refer to
2.2.8.
F7-02
1117
Note:
1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
Counter - 00 (List Print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size,
orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions.
Total Counter View Mode on the LCD
The Total Counter can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "COPY SIZE" and "PAPER TRAY"
keys simultaneously in Standby mode for quick reference.
TOTAL COUNTER
1234
LCD Contrast Adjustment
Press holding the CLEAR key and press ORIGINAL SIZE key for Lighter or COPY SIZE key for
Darker.
75
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.5.
Updating the Firmware
3.5.1.
Firmware Configuration
UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Quickest and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.
The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document
Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by two (2) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board
and the Scanner Control (Scanner).
SC PC Board
On Board
PC
Ethernet Port
Standard
Configuration
F-ROM
CPU
4 MB
(A)
(1)
Program
With PCL Option

Configuration
(B)
(2)
Program
With PS Option
Configuration
(D)
(5)
Program
4 MB
4 MB
4 MB
PC
USB Port
Slot 1 (CN327)
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
Flash Memory
Card
4 MB or 8 MB
(C) 8MB
(3)
Program
2 MB
(a)
(E) 8MB
(6)
Program
(a)
4 MB
(4)
(7)
Font
4 MB
(b)
Font
4 MB
(b)
SPC PC Board
CPU
F-ROM
2 MB
Scanner Control Program

Panel Control Program (Display & Key In)
Bitmap Data
Font Data
B. SC PC Board Firmware
The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. An Optional Expansion 8 MB
Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard and the 8 MB of SLOT 1 depends upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (A).
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM
Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the
SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card.
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PCL Control Program (3) and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).
76
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
C. SPC PC Board Firmware

The 2 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner
Control and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data
from the SC PCB.
D. Firmware Updating Ports
Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(2) USB Port (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can
also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
(3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate)
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
To update the SC, SPC and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard
configuration or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL or PS/PCL configuration.
3.5.2.
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
[Navy Blue Control Panel]
Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe
[Light Blue Control Panel]
Firmware Code File:
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
77
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code

Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the
Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable.
Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for
other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No.
prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations).
(Light Blue Control Panel).
Parent Firmware File Folder
\ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx
(Navy Blue Control Panel)
\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx
(Light Blue Control Panel)
\ DP-190_180_xxR_xxxxxx
\ DP-190_180_xx_xxxxxx
Sub Firmware File Folder

\ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
\ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
User
Authentication
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transferring Order
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically
by selecting the Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section
"Updating through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name, or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
78
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.5.3.
Updating through USB Port (Alternate Method)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2. Preparing the Firmware Code
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:

Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.
79
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for

\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx
Transferring
Order
DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
1
DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin
2
DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
1
DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
2
DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
1
DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin
2
DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
1
DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
1-1
DP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
1-2
DP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin
1-3
2
Firmware File
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window
appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting
the Firmware Type.
Note:
2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
80
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.4.
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate Method)
3.5.5.
Creating a Master Firmware Card
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning
Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC
Power Cord.)
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.
5. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency
Recovery)
A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit

The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Setup:
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:
81
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Card

Power Cord.)
2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.
(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
Power Cord.)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.5.6.
Erasing the Master Firmware Card
Power Cord.)
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET
TO START. Press STOP.
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
82
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.5.7.
User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)
(Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify
that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then
you cannot add this feature.
Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating
Instructions (For User Authentication).
3.5.7.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available
1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode.
2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode.
3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode.
4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode.
5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000)
6. Press the 3 key twice, if 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY displays on the LCD, this signifies that User
Authentication is available on the machine.
7. Press the RESET key, to exit the General Settings mode.
8. If 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY is not displayed on the LCD, then you cannot add this feature.
3.5.7.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List
6. Press the 0 key, and then press SET key.
7. Press the SET key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST.
8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ******* DP-190 v4 *******.
9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example ******* DP-190 *******), then you cannot add this
feature.
83
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.5.8.
Notice after installing the HDD option
UF-9000
DP-180/190
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed
(similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence
below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on
the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown
Mode)", continue to step 2 below.
2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive
Unit and advances into ENERGY SAVER MODE.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the
Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down
procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by
SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power
Off.
7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
3.5.9.
Firmware Emergency Recovery
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master
Firmware Flash Card method (1 Flash Card required).
Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first as it only requires 1 file (SC) to bring the machine to initial working condition.
Note:
It is not possible to recover the SPC using this method.
After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool
or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off.
Before proceeding to the next step, you must create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the
appropriate sections first 3.5.5).
2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from Master Firmware Card.
84
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3.5.10. Firmware Version

SC
DX-TRI A A Vxxxxx (a) AU

DP-TRI A A Vxxxxx (a) AU
Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is divided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E : Optional
Model Number
SPC
DX-TRI S A A Vxxxxx
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
AA: Fixed
SPC
Model Number
85
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.6.
Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side
UF-9000
DP-180/190
When installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment may be required.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory.
If copy image is abnormal, especially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.
3.6.1.
Printer Registration
1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
standby.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Letter or A4, place as Portrait.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)
Two lines are printed
5 mm
5 mm
Two lines are printed
3.6.2.
LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray
Note:
Do not pull out the 1st tray to disable it when adjusting the 2nd tray. The 1st tray is required as it acts
as a paper path for the paper in the 2nd tray.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-12, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray.
standby.
86
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
3.6.3.
LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
3.6.4.
Original Registration & CCD Read Adjustments
3.6.5.
ADF Original Read Edge & ADF Main Scan Adjustments
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
standby.
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner.

4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the Original Registration.
7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (CCD Read Position), to adjust the CCD Read for the side
position.
9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
standby.
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF.

4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test).
5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait.
6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust the ADF Original Read Edge.
7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Image Read Start), to adjust the ADF Main Scan for Side
position.
9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value.
standby.
87
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4 Troubleshooting
4.1.
Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart

START
Plug the Power Cord, and
turn the Power Switches ON.
Does the unit power up

normally?
No
Does the LCD display
function correctly?
Yes
No
Yes
Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display (Sect. 4.2).
Troubleshoot any 3-digit

INFO. CODE displayed.
Does the unit produce

normal copies?
No
Yes
Does the original document No

feed through correctly?
Troubleshoot the
Yes
Document Feeder
(Sect. 4.5).
Does the recording paper No
exit the unit?
Yes
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, network
connection, polling,
information codes, or
diagnostic codes).
Check for recording

paper path problems.
Troubleshoot printed
copy quality problems
(Sect. 4.4).
88
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Improper LCD Display

START
Check connectors on the SC PCB

and PNL PCB.
Is LED/LCD displayed?
Yes
No
Does the display appear normal?

Yes
No
Does CNP306, pin 6 on the SC Yes

PCB measure +5 VDC?
No
Replace the LCD

Module.
Replace the SC PCB.

Is the trouble
resolved?
Yes
No
Replace the Low

Voltage Power
Supply Unit.
No
Replace the
Touch Panel.
Is the trouble resolved?

Yes
END
END
Note:
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep
pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved.
ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer
COPY SIZE
: Brighter
89
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.3.
Printed Copy Quality Problems

Black Copy
Paper Travel
4.3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START
Is the printout in Service

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.
No
Is the Toner Cartridge

operational?
Yes
Is the Power Supply

Unit normal?
No
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
No
1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the Power Supply Unit.
2. Check the contacts between
PSU and Toner Cartridge.
3. Replace the PSU.
Yes
Is the SC PCB normal?
No
Yes
1. Check all connectors and voltages

on the SC PCB.
2. Replace the SC PCB.
END
90
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Blank Copy
Paper Travel
4.3.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No

operational?
No
Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or stains on the BTR?
No
Yes
Is the Power Supply Unit

normal?
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft,

dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.
1. Check all connectors and

voltages on the Power Supply
Unit.
2. Check the Connector and
voltage on the Power
Supply Unit.
3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
Yes

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No
Is the SC PCB normal?
Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
No
Yes

voltages on the SC PCB.
END
91
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Vertical White Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
No

operational?
Replace the recording paper.
No
Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes
or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
No
Yes
1. Remove the particles from
the laser beam path or clean the stains.
Are there any foreign particles Yes

No
Are the Fuser and Pressure

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth.

2. Replace the BTR.
No
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
92
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Ghost Images
A
AAA
A
Paper Travel
4.3.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Yes
No

operational?
No
Yes
No
Yes

Yes
No

dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.
END
93
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Vertical Dark Lines
P
START

Mode 3 normal?
Paper Travel
4.3.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Yes
No
No
operational?
1. Clean the Corona Wire

as illustrated below.
2. Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes

No
Yes
Is the Laser Unit (LSU)

normal?
Yes
No

Yes
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry

cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.
Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
END
Carefully wipe the Corona Wire in the Toner Cartridge by sliding

a dry Cotton Swab from end to end a few times.
Corona Wire
94
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Horizontal Dark Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
No
Yes

operational?
Yes
No
Yes
Are there any foreign
particles or stains on the BTR?
dry cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.
No
No
Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?

Yes

normal?
No
voltages on the Power
Supply Unit .
2. Check the Connector and
voltage on the Power
Supply Unit.
3. Replace the Power Supply
Unit.
Yes

No
Yes
END
95
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Dark Background
Paper Travel
4.3.7.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Yes
No

operational?
No
Yes
Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal?
No
Yes

(HVPS) normal?
No
Unit (HVPS).
Yes
2. Replace the Power Supply Unit

(HVPS).

Yes
No
END
96
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Light Print
Paper Travel
4.3.8.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
No
Yes
Yes
No

operational?
Replace the paper.
No
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path?
No
Is the Power Supply Unit (HVPS)

normal?
Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
voltages on the Power Supply Unit
(HVPS).
(HVPS) .
Yes
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller

surfaces clean?
Yes
No
97
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Horizontal White Lines
Paper Travel
4.3.9.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START

Mode 3 normal?
Yes
No
Yes
No

operational?
No
Yes
No
Yes

(HVPS) normal?
Yes
No

Yes
No
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry

cloth.
2. Replace the BTR.

Unit (HVPS).
(HVPS).
END
98
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
P
START
Yes
No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?
No
Yes
Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly
becomes an open-circuit.
99
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Voids in Solid Areas
Paper Travel
4.3.11.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
START
Yes
No

operational?
No
Yes
Yes
No
END
100
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Paper Travel
4.3.12. Black Dots
START

operational?
No
Yes
Yes
No
END
101
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Paper Travel
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases
START
Yes
No

or stains in the paper path?
No
Yes
Is the recording paper skewing?
Yes
Remove any obstructions and

clean the paper path.
No

or stains in the Fuser Unit?
Ensure the paper is set under the

Paper Separation Clips in the
Cassette.
Yes
1. Remove any foreign particles
or clean the stains.
2. Replace the Fuser Unit.
No
END
102
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality

START
Is the Test Pattern printout
in Service Mode 3 normal?
No
3. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
4. Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Yes
Make a local copy.
Is the printed copy correct?
No
Yes
Check the Transmission Block.

(CCD PCB and SC PCB)
Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.
Is the received copy correct?
No
Yes
Is a poor copy printed only

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes
1. Check the SC PCB.

2. Check the FXB PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cable.
No
Telephone line quality is poor.
(Refer to 4.6.)
The transmitting machine

may be defective.
END
103
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.15. Abnormal Printing

START
Is the recording paper loaded

in the Cassette properly?
No
Yes
Is the recording paper size and

thickness within specification?
1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.

2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper
Separation Clips.
No
Yes
Is a Panasonic Toner
Cartridge being used?
Replace with correct paper.
No
Yes
Are all switches and sensors

operating properly?
Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge.
No
Yes

or paper pieces in the receiver
unit?
No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Adjust, clean or replace.
Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
from the receiver unit.
No
1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and
springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Yes
Is the receiving mechanism

operating correctly?
Yes
No
Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
104
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.3.16. Scanned Copy Quality Problems

START
Is the LED Array abnormal?
Yes
No
Are there any foreign particles or

paper pieces in the scanning area?
Replace the LED Array.
Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper
pieces from the scanning area.
No
Is the scanning area dirty?
Yes
No
Are the Transmitting Rollers

dirty?
Clean the Scanning Glass.

Clean the Mirrors.
Yes
No
Is the Scanner Assembly abnormal?

No
Clean the rollers.
Yes
1. Check SC PCB.
2. Check CCD PCB.
3. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.).
4. Replace the CIS Assembly (Sect. 2.).
END
105
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.4.
4.4.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Document Feeder (ADF)

No Document Feed
START
Is the ADF Unit closed?
No
Yes
Is the adjustment of the

Separation Rubber normal?
Close the ADF Unit firmly.
No
Yes
Is the Separation Rubber worn

out?
No
Yes
Clean or adjust the Separation

Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).
Replace the Separation Rubber.
Is the ADF Roller clean?
No
Yes
Is the ADF Roller worn out?
Clean the surface of the roller

with water (Sect. 2.).
Yes
Replace the ADF Roller
(Sect. 2.).
No
Does the ADF Roller drive

properly?
Yes
No
Does the ADF Roller's gear
system function properly?
Yes
No
Adjust the gear system or replace
defective parts.
END
106
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.4.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Document Does Not Feed or Multiple Feeds

START
No
Yes
Is the adjustment of the

Separation Rubber normal?
No
Yes
Is the Separation Rubber worn

out?
No
Yes
Clean or adjust the Separation

Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).
Replace the Separation Rubber.
Is the ADF Roller clean?
No
Yes
Is the ADF Roller worn out?
Clean the surface of the roller

with water (Sect. 2.).
Yes
Replace the ADF Roller
(Sect. 2.).
No
Does the ADF Roller drive

properly?
Yes
No
Does the ADF Roller's gear
system function properly?
Yes
No
Adjust the gear system or replace
defective parts.
END
107
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.4.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Document Jam (030) or Skew

START
Mod
Copy le
Samp
No
Yes
Do all sensors
operate normally?
No
Yes
Does the Feed Roller have

drive and sufficient friction?
Clean or replace Sensor PCB.
No
Yes
Clean the surface of roller

with water.
No
Is the document path clear
of foreign particles or paper?
Remove the foreign particles
or papers from the document
path.
Yes
Is the Transmitting
mechanism operating
properly?
Yes
No
Adjust or replace any
defective parts.
END
108
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Communications
This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These
errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with
Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems.
It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant
parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after
the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings.
4.5.1.
Communication Trouble
Perform a communication test after changing settings.
START
Is this an international
communication?
Yes
No
TransmittingSide
#021 : Off
#025 : 1st
On
2nd
ReceivingSide
#018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz
#030 : 75 ms 1 sec
#033 : 33600 bps
31200 to 2400 bps/
TC9600/TC7200
To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unit

and the phone company exchange.
TransmittingSide
#014 : 0 dBm
4, 8, 12 dBm
ReceivingSide
#013 : 0 dBm
4, 8, 12 dBm
To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio).

TransmittingSide
ReceivingSide
#010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm

#017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps
#011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm

#018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps
#019 : On Off
#023 : Normal
Long
#033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps
To cope with impulse noise.

ReceivingSide
#070 : 128
256 to 2048
To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo.

TransmittingSide
#025 : 1st 2nd
ReceivingSide
#024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz
#030 : 75 ms 1 sec
109
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Poor Transmitted Copy Quality

START
Make a copy.
Is the printed copy normal?

Yes
No
No
Is the LED Array lit?

Yes
Does +24 VDC alive on

the SC PCB?
Yes
Does nLEDON go Low
when the scan starts?
Yes
Perform a transmission test

to a reference fax unit.
Replace the LVPS.

No
Replace the SC PCB.
Check CN on the SC
PCB and the LED
harness.
Does the problem still

occur?
Yes
Replace the LED Array.
No
Are CN (SC PCB)

and CN (CCD PCB)
connected properly?
Yes
Connect them correctly.
1. Replace the Scanner

Block.
Is the transmitted copy
normal?
Yes
No
Does poor transmitted copy

appear when transmitting to
a specific receiver?
Yes
No
1. Check CN (SC PCB)

and CN (FXB PCB).
2. Check the telephone line cable.
Replace if necessary.
Telephone line quality is

poor.
The receiving unit may be

defective.
END
110
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Dialing Problems
START
Does the unit proceed to

Phase B?
No
Are you using One-Touch

or ABBR dialing?
Yes
1. Set documents on the ADF correctly.
2. Check the telephone line connection.
3. The called party is busy.
4. Refer to Sect. 4.
Yes
Check the registered telephone number.
No
Are you using direct dialing?
Yes
No
Is the Monitor Volume

too loud or too low?
No
Check the dialed telephone number.
Yes
Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the
"/\" or "\/" curser keys.
END
111
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Transmission Problems
START
Does the ID display?
No
Yes
Does the Verification Stamp

operate?
1. No ID function at the remote unit.

2. The ID is not set for the remote unit.
No
1. Set "STAMP=ON"
2. Check the SC PCB.
3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid.
Yes
Is the copy quality OK?
No
Yes
Any other problems?

No
Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.
Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the
Information Codes).
END
112
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Reception Problems
START
Does the machine answer

the Ringing signal?
Yes
Is the received copy OK?
No
1. Set "RCV = AUTO"
2. Check that all covers are closed firmly.
3. Check the telephone line connection.
4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting.
5. Check the recording paper path.
6. Check the SC PCB and FXB PCB.
7. Replace the FXB PCB.
No
Yes
Any other problems?

No
Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.14.
Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the
Information Codes).
END
113
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.5.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Polling Problems
START
Is Polling reception OK?
No
Yes
Is Polling transmission OK?
1. Set the same polling password as the other party

is using.
2. Check the password of the remote unit.
No
Yes
Any other problems?

No
1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.*

2. Check the password of the remote unit.
Yes
See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting using information codes).
END
Note:
No-check Mode means that password is not set.
114
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.6.
4.6.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Preinstallation
Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet
Parameters List that you just printed.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
No
Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,
match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
No
Ask the Network Administrator to
verify the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the
Gateway match ?
No
Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
No
Yes
Does the Default Gateway respond to the
"ping IP" command ?
Yes
Check the power switch, cables and the

current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the

"ping IP" command ?
No
Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
No
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"ping host name" command ?
Ask the Network Administrator to check the

Default Gateway and system status.
No
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"telnet" command ?
Replace the SC PCB
Yes
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the
POP/SMTP account and system status.
115
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.6.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model
Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com
Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.mgcs.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server
Server
sv2.labo.mgcs.com
[192.168.1.2]
Network A
[192.168.3.0]
sv1.labo.mgcs.com
[192.168.1.1]
[192.168.3.254]
Router (R1)
[192.168.1.253]
Network B
[192.168.1.0]
"ping"
PC Client
[192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.mgcs.com
Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.mgcs.com
Panasonic Device
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.mgcs.com
Network C
[192.168.4.0]
PC Client
[192.168.4.1]
fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com
116
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2. Checking the Current Configuration

Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NT
The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name
DNS Servers
Node Type
NetBIOS Scope ID
IP Routing Enabled.
WINS Proxy Enabled
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS
: ec4.labo.pcc.com
: 192.168.1.1
: Hybrid
:
: No
: No
: No
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1

Description
:
: IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address
DHCP Enabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary WINS Server
: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8
: No
: 192.168.3.4
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.3.254
: 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count
:
-w timeout :
The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
117
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PINGing the Unit

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com
Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253
PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:
PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com
Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:
If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
118
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10
-w 2000
:
:
The number of echo requests that the command should send.

Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000

Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:
4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:
a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
4 ms
4 ms
2 ms
5 ms
2 ms 192.168.3.254
5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
119
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
5. Managing Network Route Tables

In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address
192.168.3.0
192.168.1.0
Netmask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Gateway
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
Interface
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took
only a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables,
some are shown below:
MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
120
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.0
192.168.3.0
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
Netmask
0.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
192.168.3.254
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Interface
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Metric
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working
properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1
NS(Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com.
NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com.
MX
10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com.
NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1
A
192.168.1.1
sv2
A
192.168.1.2
ec5
A
192.168.1.4
A
192.168.3.4
ec4
A
192.168.3.5
ef1
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
121
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command

TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]
Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
122
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.7.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Error Codes (For Copier)
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier. When trouble
occurs, the copier stops.
Note:
Some Codes are not used in the UF-9000/DP-180/190, and are reserved for future use.
4.7.1.
User Error Codes (U Code)
U20
U21
U90
U52
U01
U13 / U16
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
Code
U01
U13
U16
U20
U21
U52
U90
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Item
Check Points
CLOSE FRONT COVER
1. Front Cover is open.
2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Front Cover Sensor is defective.
4. LVPS connector is disconnected.
5. LVPS is defective.
6. Engine PCB is defective.
TONER IS RUNNING LOW
1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.
or
2. Low Toner.
OUT OF TONER
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
5. Engine PCB connector is disconnected.
NO CARTRIDGE
1. No Toner Cartridge.
CLOSE ADF COVER
1. ADF Cover is open.
2. ADF is not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.
CLOSE PLATEN COVER
While the copier is initializing, the ADF Cover was
opened.
SCANNER SELF-CHECK
1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
2. SC/SPC PCB is defective.
REPLACE BATTERY
Backup Battery is wearing out.
123
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.7.1.1.
Low Toner Messages / Operation

The Toner Cartridge Yield is approximately 5,000 pages using Letter or A4 size paper and 5% Black
coverage, however, the maximum yield will not exceed 6,000 pages.
The machine controls the printer to maintain good print quality by controlling the Bias Voltage with the Low
Toner Sensor and the Print Counter.
There are three Toner warning LCD Displays:
LCD 1: [TONER IS RUNNING LOW: U13]
Low Toner sensor detects Low Toner or the machine has printed 5,500 pages.
Preparing a new cartridge for replacement is recommended.
LCD 2: [WARNING TONER LOW LESS THAN 50 PAGES]
450 pages have been printed since the LCD 1 appeared.
Replacement with the new cartridge is recommended.
LCD 3: [OUT OF TONER: U13]
50 pages have been printed after LCD 2 appeared or 6,000 pages have been printed.
Replace with the new cartridge.
When replacing with a New Cartridge, perform the steps below to reset the Print Counter.
1. Press "FUNCTION" key.
2. Press "1" or the "Arrow" key to enter "GENERAL SETTINGS".
3. Press "SET" key.
4. Press "4" to enter "04 TONER REPLACEMENT PRESS SET TO SELECT".
5. Press "SET" key, then "TONER REPLACEMENT? 1:Yes 2:No".
6. Press "1" key to reset the Print Counter.
7. Press "STOP" key to return to the Standby mode.
124
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.7.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Jam Error Codes (J Code)
B
C
Section
A
B
C
Code
J00
J01
J02
J43
J44
J70
J71
J80
J82
J83
J92
J93
Jam Location
ADF
Paper Transport / Exit Area
Paper Entry Area
Jam Error Codes (J Codes) Table

Contents
Section
The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after paper
started feeding. (Sheet Bypass)
The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
C
Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)
The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)
Paper Jam in the Registration Sensor or Paper Path Sensor.
B, C
Paper Jam in the Paper Exit / ADU Paper Jam Sensor.
Read Point Sensor does not go ON within 10 seconds after the original starts feeding.
(Information Code 030 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)
A
Original was longer than 78.7 in (2m).
(Information Code 031 or 032 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.)
The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a
predetermined time.
The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU
C
Middle Sensor is activated.
The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has
lapsed.
The Original was pulled out when feeding an original.
A
The Original remained in the ADF.
125
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Sensor and Switch Location
126
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.7.2.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Copy / Print Over Flow / Flow

Service Mode F5-10: Exit Tray Limitation (Paper Stack Limitation)
0: None
1: 150 Sheets/Accumulate
2: 150 Sheets/Job
Select 1 or 2
Copy or Print
Is the job larger than 150
pages?
FAX/EMAIL
No
Normal Function
Yes
Stop printing when 150 pages
print out
1
COPY, PRINT mode
EXIT TRAY FULL:
EMPTY & PRESS START
FAX/EMAIL, SCAN mode
EXIT TRAY FULL:
PRESS COPY
Warning Display
STOP
No
Cancel Job?
START
Yes
Print the Remaining Job

Pages
Job Clear
1 If next Job is performed at this point in time

Copy
Copy or Print
Cancel "Pi Pi Pi" Sound
Print
*1
Is Sort Memory Space
Available?
Yes
Wait for Previous Job to
Complete
No
Time Out -> Error Display on

Print Queue Screen
*1 : Same Function as when the next

print job is received in Queue during
Paper Jam
F5-10: [2]
After Pending Job is
Completed, Printing Will Start
F5-10: [1]
Start Print Count from 0

Add the Previous Page of a Job
as Accumulative Print Count
127
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.7.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

E1: Optical Unit Error
Code
Function
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass
Scanning
E1- 22 Polygon Motor Synchronization
E1- 31 Scanning Lamp

(does not turn On)
Check Points
1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor is defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.
6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
7. SPC PCB is defective.
3. Laser Unit is defective.
4. LVPS connectors is disconnected.
6. SC PCB is defective.
1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected.
2. Scanning Lamp is defective.
3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
5. SC PCB is defective.
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

Code
Function
E2 Not Applicable
Code
Function
E3- 20 Main Motor Rotation
Check Points
E3: Development System Error
Check Points
1. Drive Mechanism is defective.
2. Main Motor connector is disconnected.
3. Main Motor is defective.
E4: Fuser Unit Error
Code
Function
E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature
Check Points
1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty.
2. Thermistor position is incorrect.
3. Fuser temperature is low.
4. Thermistor is defective.
5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected.
6. Fuser Thermostat is defective.
7. Fuser Lamp is defective.
128
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
E4: Fuser Unit Error

Code
Function
E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor Rotation
(Fuser Unit Side)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Check Points
1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Exhaust Fan is defective.
E5: System Error
Code
Function
E5- 05 SPC Firmware Failure
E5- 11 Thermistor, Toner Sensor
E5- 12 Main CPU/SPC Interface Error
Check Points
1. SC/Engine PCB connector is disconnected.
2. SC/Engine PCB is defective.
1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
2. SC/SPC PCB is defective.
E7: Optional Unit Error

Code
Function
E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal
Check Points
1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.
2. Hardware Key is defective.
E13: Low Toner or Out of Toner

Code
Function
Check Points
E13 TONER IS RUNNING LOW
1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.
or
2. Out of Toner.
OUT OF TONER
3. Low Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Low Toner Sensor is defective.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed.
129
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.8.
Information Code Table (For Facsimile)
Code
001
Mode
RCV
COPY
002
RCV
COPY
007
RCV
COPY
008
010
RCV
COPY
011
STANDBY
012
RCV
017
030
XMT
031
045
XMT
COPY
STANDBY
RCV
COPY
STANDBY
RCV
COPY
STANDBY
060
041
043
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fax Information Codes

Phase
Description of Problem
Cause
C, D Leading edge of the recording
Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Timing
Timing Sensor abnormal.
Sensor. (1st Tray)
C, D Leading edge of the recording
Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Timing
Timing Sensor abnormal.
Sensor. (2nd Tray)
C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam.
paper fails to reach the Paper Paper Exit Sensor abnormal.
Exit Sensor.
2. Recording paper has not
completely passed the Paper
Exit Sensor.
Paper Tray is opened while paper Paper Tray is opened.
is feeding.
B, C No recording paper.
No recording paper or paper is not set
properly.
No Paper Sensor is defective.
B, C Paper Tray is not installed
Connector is not installed properly.
properly.
C, D The length of the received
Transmitter Document Jam.
document is over 2 m.
Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect.
Paper Tray.
B
Read Point Sensor does not go
Document is not set properly.
ON within 10 seconds after the
Defective Read Point Sensor.
document starts feeding.
C
Transmitting document was longer The document may jam.
than 2 meter (or 78.7 in).
Defective Read Point Sensor.
B, C, D Out of Toner.
No toner.
Defective Low Toner Sensor.
B, C, D Low Toner.
Toner is getting low.

Defective Low Toner Sensor.
No Toner Cartridge.
Printer Cover is open.
061
ADF Door is open.
400
XMT
T1 timer (35 5 sec.) elapsed

without detecting 300 bps signal.
Toner Cartridge has not been installed.

Defective Toner Cartridge Sensor.
Cover is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
Door is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
Incorrect number was dialed and the
START button was pushed.
Telephone line was disconnected while
dialing.
SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are
defective.
Receiver is defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
130
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
401
Mode
XMT
402
XMT
403
RCV
(Polling)
404
XMT
405
XMT
406
RCV
(Password
Comm.)
407
XMT
408
XMT
409
XMT
410
RCV
411
RCV
(Polling)
412
G3 RX
414
RCV
(Polling)

Phase
Cause
B
DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT.
Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password.
B
DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for
only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
B
Transmitter had no polling
"POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is
function.
not set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted is not
placed at the transmitter.
B
Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS)
Receiver is defective. (Modem)
followed by TCF three times, but SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
the receiver did not respond. (CFR Receiver disconnects line during first
or FTT is usually returned)
NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.
B
Transmitter received FTT after it
Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged
transmitted TCF at 2400bps.
due to line noise)
Received RTN after
Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.)
communicating at 2400 bps.
SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
B
XMT-Password mismatched.
XMT, RCV password does not match.
RCV-Password mismatched.
Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Selective RCV incomplete.
the last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBR
telephone number.
D
Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN.
excessive error. (Line quality is poor)
D
Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.
quality is poor)
D
Transmitter receives PIN after it
Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.
requests voice contact.
D
Received DCN while waiting for
Interface or line is faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective.
etc.)
B
Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling
NSC.
communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After SC PCB is defective.
transmitting FTT)
B
No response received after
Password does not match between
transmitting 3rd NSC.
transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter is defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
131
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
415
416
417
418
420
421
422
427
434
436
456
457
459
490
494
495

Mode
Phase
Cause
XMT
B
Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling)
message from your machine in
machine does not have the polling
polling communication.
transmission feature.
RCV
D
Receiver did not detect post
Transmitter is defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS,
Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is
EOM, etc.
distorted due to line noise)
RCV
C
Receiver returned RTN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to post message.
excessive errors in received data)
RCV
C
Receiver transmitted PIN in
Line quality is poor. (There are
response to PRI-Q from
excessive errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
requests voice contact)
RCV
B
T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without Incorrect incoming call type (voice).
detecting 300 bps signal.
(Non-facsimile communication)
RCV
B
Busy Tone is detected after
Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal.
Wrong number is dialed.
XMT
B
Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC
There is an incompatibility.
(or DTC) was invalid.
G3
B
DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS
The interface is incompatible.
RCV
transmitted.
XMT or RCV
B
CD (response from Modem) did
Remote unit is defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
G3 RX
C
DCN received after transmitting
Transmitter is defective or incompatible.
FTT.
Line quality is poor.
RCV
B
Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
RELAY XMT
B
Remote unit does not have
CONF. XMT/
Relayed XMT or Confidential
POLL
Comm. capability.
RCV
C
Failed training in Phase C.
Line quality is poor. (Training signal is
distorted due to line noise)
RCV
C
Sum of error lines exceeded the
Line quality is poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
of 64 lines.
RCV
C
Interval between two EOLs was
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
received message data.
due to line noise)
XMT
C
During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV
or continued ON for long time.
During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
current.
132
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
496
Mode
XMT
501
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
502
503

Phase
Cause
C
CS of modem is not able to turn
FXB PCB is defective.
ON.
B
Remote unit does not have
compatible Modem.
B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
or continued ON for long time.
During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective.
current.
B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn
FXB PCB is defective.
ON during training.
Line is disconnected.
B
Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set.
station.
B
Polling XMT is rejected.
No polling original is set.
540
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
RCV/V.34
(Polling)
XMT/V.34
(Polling)
XMT ECM
541
XMT ECM
542
XMT ECM
543
XMT ECM
544
XMT ECM
550
RCV ECM
554
RCV ECM
555
RCV ECM
570
RCV
571
XMT
580
XMT
581
XMT
582
XMT
601
XMT
623
XMT
504
505
No response after transmitting 3rd

CTC or DCN received.
No response after transmitting 3rd
EOR or received DCN.
No response to the 3rd RR
transmitted or received DCN.
T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without
MCF.
Stopped Transmission after EOR
Transmission.
Timer between frames in phase C
has elapsed.
Transmitted ERR after receiving
EOR.
Transmitted PIN after receiving
EOR.
Password or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
Sub-address transmission to a unit
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit
155) OFF.
Sub-address Password
transmission to a unit that has their
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
Sub-address SEP (for Polling)
transmission to a unit that has their
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
No original was in the ADF. (Builtin dialer engaged)
Incompatible interface.
Line is faulty.
FXB PCB abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Line is faulty.
FXB PCB abnormal.
Defective remote station.
Line is faulty.
Line is faulty and Operator Call
requested by RX side.
Sub-address transmission to a unit that

has no Sub-address function.
Operator removed the original from the

ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
133
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
630
631
634
638
700
711
712
714
715
716
717
718
719
720

Mode
Phase
Cause
XMT or RCV
B
Redial count over.
No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
(Polling)
is not detected. (destination dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (destination
dependent) T1 timer (35 5 sec.)
elapsed without a signal from the
receiver.
XMT
A
"STOP" button was pressed during
Auto Dialing.
XMT
B
Redial count over with no
Telephone line cable is disconnected.
response or busy tone was not
Wrong number is dialed.
detected.
SC or FXB PCB is abnormal.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
XMT
LAN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off.
data in memory or during
Power failure occurred.
communication.
XMT
PSTN Communication terminated by
RCV
LAN Operator pressing the "STOP" key.
RCV
LAN Incorrect LDAP settings.
LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login
Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP
Search Base are incorrect.
XMT
LAN Unknown email address replied
Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server.
address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
XMT
LAN LAN Interface error.
The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not
RCV
Cannot logon to the LAN.
connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
Check the SC PCB connector.
XMT
LAN TCP/IP connection timed out.
Incorrect IP Address is set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
XMT
LAN Cannot logon to the LAN.
Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is
set.
No email application is activated on the
Mail Server.
XMT
LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol
Mail Servers hard disk may be full.
transmission.
Mail Server is defective.
XMT
LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your
Ask originator to re-send in a supported
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the
Tray(s).
RCV
LAN Received data via LAN is in a
Ask the originator to re-send with a
format that is not supported.
supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
POP
LAN Unable to connect with the POP
Incorrect POP Server address is set.
Server.
POP Server is down.
134
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
721
722
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
741
800
814
815
816
825
826
870

Mode
Phase
Cause
POP
LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is
set.
RCV
LAN Failed to obtain the Network
LAN Cable is disconnected.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, DHCP is not available.
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
XMT
LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.
POP
DNS Server is down.
XMT
LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set.
POP
the DNS Server.
Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.
XMT
LAN Received an Error or No
Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or
Response from the Remote
Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT.
Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible)
XMT
LAN
Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory
Overflow or No Power.
(Retry is not possible)
XMT
LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP
SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when
and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
RCV
LAN Unable to program the Internet
Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer with set to 2: Valid.
Email from a PC.
RCV
LAN Dialer full while Relayed
Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was
(70 stations) are being used.
received.
XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial
Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
Relay
PSTN The machine was requested to
Comm.
relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
Conf. XMT
The remote station does not have
Conf. Polling
Relay XMT nor Confidential
Relay
Communication capability.
Comm.
Conf. RCV
Mailbox is full.
Conf. Polled
"The received Polling Password
did not match. The machine does
not have Confidential Comm.
capability."
Conf. RCV
Parameter settings of the initial
Conf. Polled
sending station are not properly
set.
Receiver side does not have correct
RCV
B
If applicable sub-address is not
registered in the phone book of the sub-address in their phone book.
receiver side when using subaddressing function.
MEM XMT PSTN Memory overflow occurred while
Multi-Copy
storing documents into memory.
135
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Code
879
Mode
Memory
RCV
880
884
961
962
RCV
XMT

Phase
Cause
PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow.
Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
File Access Error.
File Access Error.
LAN Memory file access error.
SC PCB is defective.
PSTN Memory file access error.
LAN Memory file access error.
136
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
4.9.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service technician to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES
01
OK
001
FILE DURATION X/R

129
00:00'42
XMT
IDENTIFICATION
123 456 789
DATE
MMM-dd
TIME
01:55
1st digit
DIAGNOSTIC
C8649003C0000
13th digit
- PANASONIC UF-9000/DP-180/190
********************************** - UF-9000/DP-180/190 - ****** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Manufacturer
Code
Casio
Canon
Sanyo
Sharp
Tamura
Toshiba
NEC
Oki
Hitachi
Xerox
Fujitsu
Matsushita
Mitsubishi
Murata
Ricoh
137
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG)
RTN
DCN
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
Received
STOP Button
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Resolution (dpi)
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
600 x 600
-

Definition
Paper Width
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
-
138
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
Scanning Rate
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Resolution
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Std
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Memory/
Deferred Comm.
Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Used
Manual
Non-Memory
Communication
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Non-Memory
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Non-Memory
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Non-Memory
Memory
Manual
Communication
Used
Manual
Memory
Communication
Auto Dialing
Memory
Used
Auto Dialing
Memory
Auto RCV
Memory
Used
Auto RCV
Memory
Remote RCV
Memory
Used
Remote RCV
Memory
139
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Polling
XMT/RCV
Selective Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Password
Comm.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Sub-Address
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Definition
Confidential
Relayed Comm.
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Turnaround
Polling
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
140
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Advanced
Comm.
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
-

Definition
Cover Sheet
XMT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Short Protocol
B
D
-

Definition
Standard/ NonStandard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
Non-Standard
141
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Coding
MH
MR
MMR
MH
MR
MMR
-

Definition
ECM
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Symbol Rate
(V.34)
2400 sr
2800 sr
3000 sr
3200 sr
3429 sr
-
V.34
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
142
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Modem Speed
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC 7200 bps
TC 9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
-

Definition
Modem Speed
(V.34)
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
-
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

Definition
Line Status
Private Line
-
143
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.10. Troubleshooting (For Printer)

4.10.1. Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
Ensure that the Unit is turned On
Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
No error message is displayed on the Unit
Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.10.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem
Possible Solution(s)
Character is not printing in the

correct positions or the
characters near the edges of the
page are missing.
Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
driver to coincide with the application.
Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of 14 inches (5 mm) on all sides.
The font type is incorrect
Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.

Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Select Always use True Type fonts from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth.
Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be

obtained.
Select 600 dpi resolution.
Poor photograph print quality.
Different character or symbol

from the document is printed.
Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
The printer does not print

anything or prints irregular
images from the middle of the
1st page.
Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an

Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Printing is exceedingly slow.
Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
144
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
4.10.3. Error Message Appears on the PC

Error Message
Network Print DLL Error.
Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/
is 100Base-TX cable properly connected.
Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy.
The Panasonic Device may be processing someonefs print job,

please wait, and try again later.
The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is

found in the current printer
setting.
Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the
application and the printer driver settings.
4.10.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message
Cannot complete print job
Image memory overflow
The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be

enough to complete the print job.
Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Cannot complete
Confirm print condition
The print settings may not be matched for the system.

Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
i.e. Multi-sized printing.
Cannot print
System error
Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties

dialog box.
4.10.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem
Cannot read the drive.
Insert the CD into the drive and click Retry.
145
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
5 Service Modes
5.1.
Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
5.1.1.
Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode

The service mode is selected when FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE and 3 keys are sequentially
pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.
2. To exit the Service Mode
The service mode is reset when the FUNCTION and CLEAR keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2.
Copier Service Mode Functions

Service
Mode
F1
Self Test
Item
Function
00 CCD Test
01 LCD/LED Test
This test is used for checking the CCD.

This test is used for checking the LCD
and LEDs.
This test is used for checking the Page
Memory.
Prints the pattern for setting the Paper
position alignment.
Prints the Slant pattern for setting the
Paper position alignment.
Prints the Grid pattern for setting the
Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex
One sheet is copied when the Start key
is pressed.
Multi copies are made when the Start
key is pressed.
The functioning of Input / Output items
(selected item numbers) is checked.
Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be changed.
Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be adjusted.
Electronic Counters for Maintenance
Perform pseudo-operation of an item
(selected by code numbers)
02 Page Memory Test

03 Print Test Pattern 1
F2
Single Copy Test
F3
Continuous Copy Test
F4
Input / Output Status Test
F5
Function Parameters
F6
Adjust Parameters
F7
F8
Electronic Counter
Service Adjustment
146
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
00 Fax Function Parameter
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel #
02 Firmware Version
Displays the contact number when a

machine malfunction occurs.
Displays the firmware version for SC,
SC Boot, PNL, SPC, Fax Option, Slot 1.
F5/F6 Parameter, Machine / Counter /
System Address / RAM Address
infomations.
03 Print Device Info.

04 RAM Edit Mode
Relative / Absolute Address.

Registration of Serial Number for
Maintenance.
Each RAM date clear.
Except F5, F6 Settings
- refer to F6-99 "F5/F6 Initialization"
05 Serial Number
06 RAM Initialize
07 Firmware Update
Updates the firmware in the machine

Firmware Card or the USB.
Refer to Sect. 3.5.
08 Program Backup
09 Update Prog. Card
10
11
12
13
14
Function
Creates a Master Firmware Card using

the Firmware Update Kit.
Configuration for Program copy.
Backup the Parameter.
Restore the Parameter.
Displays the page memory size (MB).
Displays the sort memory size (MB).
Program Copy
Parameter Backup
Parameter Restore
Page Memory Size
Sort Memory Size
147
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F5-00
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
. . . . .
Frequency desired
. . . . .
. . . . .
LSU off timer
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
F5-10
F5-11
F5-12
F5-13
F5-14
F5-15
F5-16
F5-17
F5-18
F5-19
Exit Tray Limitation

. . . . .
. . . . .
Paper out Indicator
Paper size (Tray1)
Paper size (Tray2)
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
F5-20 ADF
F5-21 . . . . .
F5-22 . . . . .
60Hz
5 Sec.
None
On
Letter-R
Letter-R
Auto
F5-50
F5-51
F5-52
F5-53
F5-54
F5-55
F5-56
F5-57
F5-58
F5-59
Auto contrast adj.

Dept. Counter (COPY)
Dept. Counter (FAX)
2-sided auto shift
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Ope.add toner alarm
Yes
No
No
No
F5-60
F5-61
F5-62
F5-63
F5-64
F5-65
F5-66
F5-67
F5-68
F5-69
Auto Tray selection

. . . . .
. . . . .
U13 clear
Dept. Counter (SCAN)
Dept. Counter (PRINT)
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Reduce N in 1 space
Yes
F5-70 PM cycle
F5-71 . . . . .
F5-72 . . . . .
Stop
Any keys
No
No
No
85K
148
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- M A C H I N E S E T U P I N F O R M A T I O N -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME
MAC ADDRESS
SERIAL NUMBER
: UF-9000
: 080023016C81
:
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC(SCANNER)
PRINTER
FAX MODEM
PDL FONT1
SC2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY
SORT MEMORY
FAX MEMRY
: 32 MB
: 16 MB
: 2 MB
4.OPTION
2nd PAPER FEED MODULE
PCL PRINTER
PS PRINTER
HDD
:
:
:
:
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT
: 503
BAT001xxAU
V006
V010018
V6493
V00039
Ver 6D01
CAV10000b
CAV13500aAU
No
No
No
No
NO. DATE & TIME

ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
NO. DATE & TIME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J97
XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J44
XX-00000140
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC
******************************* -
- ***** -
0001- *********
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
149
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F7-01 Key Operator ID Code
000
F7-02
F7-03
F7-04
F7-05
F7-06
F7-07
F7-08
F7-09
F7-10
Total Count
PM Count
Scanner PM Count
. . . . .
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
. . . . .
. . . . .
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
295
295
61
F7-11
F7-12
F7-13
F7-14
F7-15
F7-16
F7-29
F7-30
F7-31
F7-32
Sheet Bypass Count

1st Paper Tray Count
2nd Paper Tray Count
. . . . .
. . . . .
2-Sided Count
. . . . .
A4R/LTR Count
. . . . .
FLS/LG Count
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
147
90
0
F7-17
F7-18
F7-19
F7-20
ADF Count
ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
26
26
61
18
F7-21 Copy Rint Count

F7-22 Copy Scan Count
:
:
59
180
F7-23 PC Rint Count

F7-24 PC Scan Count
:
:
0
3
F7-24 Fax Transmit Count

F7-24 Fax Receive Count
F7-24 Fax Print Count
:
:
:
24
27
21
295
295
50
28
73
0
Serial Number :
150
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.1.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
Press the "START" key.
Select 1:Check Input or 2:Check Output to activate the test then press "START" key.
Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.
When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
1. Check Input
No.
Function
021 Home Position Sensor

ADF Cover Open Sensor
F4 Mode (Check Input)

Message Display
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Home position is
1
detected.
ADF Cover is open.
1
Remarks
2. Check Output
Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.
No.
120 Lamp
Item
F4 Mode (Check Output)

Function
When SPC PCB P103-8, Inverter
CN1-2 signal level changes to 0V
from Open, Lamp operates.
Remark
The CCD / Inverter shall be
replaced as the Assembly
151
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.1.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.
Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys.
Press the "SET" key.
Enter the desired function code number and press SET key.
Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
No.
00
01
Item
Not Used
Frequency Desired
02-03 Not Used

04
LSU Off Timer
05-09 Not Used

10
Exit Tray Limitation
(Up to 150 Sheets)
11
Replace Drum
(Except USA / Canada)
12
13
Not Used
Paper Out Red Indicator
14
Paper Size (Tray 1)

(UF-9000)
Paper Size (Tray 1)
(DP-180/190)
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : Auto
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz
2 (for USA / Canada)
1 : 5 sec.
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
0 : None
1 : Accumulate
2 : Job
0 : Off
1 : User (Displays Replace Drum)
2 : Service (Enables Check & Call
function)
0
(Effective from June
2004 Production)
1 (for Others)
2 (for Germany)
(Effective from Oct.
2004 Production)
0 : On
1 : Off
4 : A4-R
12 : LEGAL
14 : LETTER-R
4 : A4-R
6 : B5-R
8 : A5-R
12 : LEGAL
14 : LETTER-R
1 (for Europe)

4 (for Europe / Others)
152
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
No.
15
Item
Paper Size (Tray 2)
(UF-9000)
Paper Size (Tray 2)
(DP-180/190)
16-19 Not Used

20
ADF
21-37 Not Used
38
Duplex Mode Default
(UF-9000)
39
40
Not Used
Double Count
41
Count Up Timing
42
KEY/DEPT. Counter
43
Key Counter Timing
44-49 Not Used
50
Auto Contrast Adjust
51
Dept. Counter (COPY)
52
Dept. Counter (FAX)
53-58 Not Used

59
Oper. Add Toner Alarm
60
Auto Tray Selection
61-62 Not Used

63
U13 Clear
(DP-180/190 only)
64
Dept. Counter (SCANNER)
65
Dept. Counter (PRINTER)
66-68 Not Used

69
Reduce N in 1 Space
F5 Mode
Function
4 : A4-R
12 : LEGAL
14 : LETTER-R
4 : A4-R
6 : B5-R
12 : LEGAL
14 : LETTER-R
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Default Setting
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
0 : No
2 : LGL
0 : At feed
1 : At exit
0 : No
2 : DEPT.
Same as F5-41
0 : UF-9000/DP-190
1
2
0
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Stop
1 : Continue
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Any keys
1 : Func + 1
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0
0
0
0
153
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
No.
70
Item
PM Cycle
71-78 Not Used

Image Process Method
79
80
Paper Size Priority
81
Foolscap Size
82
83
Not Used
Digital Skyshot Mode
84
Paper Tray Priority
85
Side Void Setting (ADF)
86
PM Cycle (Optics)
87
PM Cycle (ADF)
F5 Mode
Function
0 : No
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 85 K*
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K
14 : 200 K
15 : 240 K
0 : Error Diffusion
1 : Dither
4 : A4-R
5 : B5
7 : A5
9 : FLS1
10 : FLS2
12 : LEGAL
14 : LETTER-R
1 : FLS1
2 : FLS2
0 : Off
1 : On
0:S>C>B
1:C>S>B
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
0 : No
1 : 40 K
2 : 60 K
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
5 : 360 K
6 : 480 K
7 : 600 K
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Default Setting
0 (for UF-9000)
Effective from April
2004 Production
10 (for DP-180/190)
* Effective from June
2004 Production

1
0
0
0
0
154
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
No.
88
Item
USB Port Function
89
LAN Speed/Duplex
90
Beep Sound
91-94 Not Used

95
Paper Size (FA)
(Factory use only)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : Off
1 : Once
2 : On
0 : Auto
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
0 : Off
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other

2 (for Europe)
96-97 Not Used
155
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.1.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)
Note:
1. The Factory Setting is different in each model.
2. The machine may accept a (+/-) input value that exceeds the specified Setting Range for the
parameters in the table; however, the actual registered value will not exceed the Upper/Lower
Limitation value.
F6 Mode
No.
00-02 Not Used

03 Original Registration
04
Remarks
Setting
Range
Adjustment of platen original registration

detection timing.
Delay time is adjusted from registration roller
clutch ON.
-30 - +30
0.2mm
-50 - +16
0.5mm
Registration void should be adjusted.
0 - +99
0.5mm
-9 - 0
0.5mm
-9 - +15
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
Item
Printer Registration
05-06 Not Used

07 Registration Void
08
Trail Edge Read Timing
Adjustment of trail edge void.
09
Trail Edge Print Timing
10
Side Adjust (Bypass)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass).
11
Side Adjust (Tray 1)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray).
12
Side Adjust (Tray 2)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray).
13-15 Not Used

16 Side Adjust (ADU)
Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU).
17-32 Not Used

33 TDC Max. Read Only
Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control
34
TDC Min. Read Only
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-99 - +99
(Read only)
-99 - +99
(Read only)
156
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F6 Mode
No.
35
Item
TDC Avg. Read Only
36-38 Not Used

39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust
40 Trans Current Side 1
41-43 Not Used
44 FAX Laser Duty Adj
45
46
Not Used
PRINTER Laser Duty Adj
47-48 Not Used

49 TEXT Image Density
50
T/P Image Density
51
PHOTO Image Density
52
53
Not Used
CCD Read Position
Remarks
Adjustment of PWM value of LSU.

Adjustment of Transfer Current.
-32 - +32
-77 - +76
0.15uA
Printer Density Adjustment for FAX.

(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
-99 - +99
Printer Density Adjustment for Printer.

(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
-99 - +99
Image density adjustment for Text mode.

(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Photo mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
-99 - +99
Adjustment of CCD read position.
54
55
56
57-62
63
TEXT Mode Contrast

T/P Mode Contrast
PHOTO Mode Contrast
Not Used
Lead Edge Read Timing
Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point.
64
Side Edge Read Adjust
Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point.
65-66
67
68
69
Not Used
ADF Image Density
Not Used
Stamp Position Adjust
70-78 Not Used

79 MTF Adjust
80-89 Not Used
90 ADF Image Read Start
Setting
Range
-99 - +99
(Read only)
Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode.

Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode.
Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode.
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-42 - +44
0.2mm
-128 - +127
-128 - +127
-128 - +127
0 - +9
0.5mm
0 - +9
0.5mm
Compensation of ADF image density.
-99 - +99
Adjustment of verification stamp position.
-50 - +50
0.3mm
Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital

image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.
Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read
start position.
-2 - +2
-99 - +99
0.05mm
157
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F6 Mode
No.
Item
Remarks
91
Original Lead ADF
Adjustment of original detection timing.
92
Original Trail ADF
Adjustment of trail edge detection timing.
93-98 Not Used

99 F5/F6 Initialization
5.1.6.
Setting
Range
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-90 - +127
0.3mm
Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.
F7 Mode: Electronic Counter
F7 Mode
No.
01
Item
Key Operator ID Code
02
03
04
05
06
Total Count
PM Count
Scanner PM Count
Not Used
OPC Drum Count
07
Process Unit Count
08
09-10
11
12
13
14-15
16
17
18
ADF PM Count
Not Used
Sheet Bypass Count
Not Used
2-sided Count
ADF Count
ADF Read Count
Remarks
Key Operators identification code for access to the
counter mode.
Total count for all copies / prints.
Preventive Maintenance count.
PM count for scanner readings.
PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC
Drum.
PM count of recording paper fed through the
Process Unit.
PM count of originals fed through the ADF.
Total count of paper fed from the sheet bypass.
Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray.
Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray.
Total count of 2-sided Print.
Total count of originals fed through the ADF.
Total count of originals scanned through the ADF.
158
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F7 Mode
No.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28-29
30
31
32
99
5.1.7.
Item
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
Copy Print Count
Copy Scan Count
PC Print Count
PC Scan Count
Fax Transmit Count
Fax Receive Count
Fax Print Count
Not Used
A4R / LETTER R Count
Not Used
FLS / LEGAL Count
All Counter Clear
Remarks
Total count of scanning operations.
Total count of scanner readings.
Total count of copies printed.
Total count of copies scanned.
Total count printed from PC.
Total count scanned to PC.
Total count of Fax transmitted.
Total count of Fax received.
Total count of Fax printed.
Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
Total count of FLS / Legal Print.
All counters are cleared.
F8 Mode: Service Adjustment
F8 Mode
No.
00-05 Not Used
06 Error Log View
07
Item
Error Log Clear
08 (Factory use only)

09-17 Not Used
18 C18 PRT PWM ADJ.PTN.
(LSU PWM Pattern)
Remarks
a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine
errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are
displayed, beginning with the oldest code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
Print out the Test Pattern.
Proceed when the LSU is replaced.
159
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
F8 Mode
No.
19
Item
Move Mirror To Lock
20-46 Not Used

47 C47 ADF Scan Test
48
C48 Book Scan Test
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Remarks
a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
Place the document on the ADF first.
Press START key to begin.
Press START key to begin.
Press STOP key to finish.
49-54 Not Used
160
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.1.8.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance
F9 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
00 Fax Function Parameter
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel #
02 Firmware
Version
00 SC
01 SC Boot
02
03
04
05
PNL
SPC (Scanner)
Printer
FAX Modem
Remarks
Displays the contact number when a
machine malfunction occurs.
Displays the firmware version for SC.
Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
Displays the firmware version for PNL.
Displays the firmware version for SPC.
Displays the firmware version.
Displays the firmware version for FAX
Option 1.
06 Not Used
07 SC2
00 F5/F6 Parameters
Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.

03 Print
Prints the memory contents of the F5
Device Info.
and F6 modes.
01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
02 Counter Information Prints the Counter information list.
03 System Address
Prints the system memory setting.
Info.
04 RAM Address
Prints the RAM data dump list.
Information
04 RAM Edit
1 Relative Address
Setting of Relative address.
Mode
2 Absolute Address
Setting of Real address.
05 Serial Number
Registration of Serial Number for
Maintenance.
Clears by Shipment Set.
161
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
F9 Mode
Service
Mode
F9
Unit
06
Maintenance
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Item
RAM
Initialize
Remarks
00 Parameter Initialize
Resets the Fax and Function

parameters to default values.
01 All Job Clear
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
02 LBP Error Log Clear Clears LBP Error log
03 Shipment Set
Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
04 LBP Fuser Reset
Clears the LBP fuser error.
05 Dept. Counter Clear
Firmware
00 Update FROM Card Updates the firmware in the machine
Update
with the Master Firmware Card.
01 Update from USB
Updates the firmware in the machine
with the USB.
Program
00 Main
Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Backup
01 Option 1 all
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
(Refer to
02 Option 1 a
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Sect. 3.5.)
03 Option 1 b
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
04 Not Used
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
05 Not Used
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
06 Not Used
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
Update Prog. Card
Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB
Flash Memory Card will be required
depending upon the model.
Program
00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.
Copy
01 From card to slot 2
02 From slot 1 to card
03 From slot 1 to slot 2
04 From slot 2 to card
05 From slot 2 to slot 1
Parameter Backup
Backup the Parameter.
Parameter Restore
Restore the Parameter.
Page Memory Size
Displays the page memory size (MB).
Sort Memory Size
Displays the sort memory size (MB).
162
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.
5.2.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Service Modes (For Facsimile)

Fax Service Mode Procedure
1. To enter the Fax Service Mode

a. Press FAX/EMAIL key.
b. Press FUNCTION and then 7 keys.
c. Press MONITOR four times, then press *.
d. Enter the desired code number or press the V, /\ arrow keys.
2. To exit the Fax Service Mode
Press STOP key.
Note:
The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:
"START"
"V"
"/\"
5.2.2.
:
:
:
The new setting value is stored in the machine.

Scroll the function parameter number down.
Scroll the function parameter number up.
FAX Service Mode Table
The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
Service Mode

Description
No.
00
01
Not Used
Function Parameter Setting
02
03
RAM Edit Mode

Print Parameter List / Report
04
Modem Tests
05
06
Not Used
RAM Initialize
07
08
Not Used
Check & Call
09
System Maintenance
Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position,

etc.).
Factory use only.
Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
163
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
No.
10

Service Mode
Description
Firmware
00 SC
Displays the firmware version for SC.
Version
01 SC Boot
Displays the firmware version for SC Boot.
02 PNL
Displays the firmware version for PNL.
03 SPC (Scanner) Displays the firmware version for SPC.
04 Not Used
05 FAX Modem
Displays the firmware version for FAX.
06 Not Used
07 SC2
Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
164
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.3.
Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.
Enter the desired code number and press START key.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the V, /\ arrow keys.
Select the desired function code and press the "START" key.
No.
Parameter
000 Monitor/Tel Dial
001 Alarm Status
002 Stop Comm.

JRNL
003 Continuous Poll
004 Numeric ID Set
Function Parameter Table

Selections
Function
1 = Monitor
Selects whether the machine starts to TX
automatically during On-Hook dialing.
2 = Tel/Dial
Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
1 = Off
Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer
OFF
: Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant
Timer
: Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
2 = On
COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
1 = Off
Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
2 = Stn (Tx only)
enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only)
Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to
store or add the documents into a polled file.
(See Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "STOP".
1 = Off (will not accept)
Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
2 = On (accepts)
set or change the Numeric ID.
165
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
005
006
007
008
009
010

Parameter
Selections
Function
000
:
Austria
Destination Code
Specified destinations only.
(DP-180/190 only) 001 : U.K.
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark
004 : Taiwan
005 : Finland
006 : Germany
007 : Netherlands
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
029 : Poland
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
051 : East Euro
999 : Initialize
ID Display
1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
JRNL Column
1 = Station
Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = RCVD ID
Journal.
Monitor
1 = Off
Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On
monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
DC Loop
1 = Off (Normal)
Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook)
communication test.
TX Level
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
166
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
Parameter
011 RX Level
012 DTMF Level

013 G3 RX EQL
014 G3 TX EQL
015 ~ Not Used

016
017 TX Start
018 RX Start
019 ITU-T V.34
020 ITU-T ECM

021 EP Tone
022 Signal Interval

023 TCF Check
024 CED Frequency

Selections
Function
1 = -43 dBm
Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm
dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
00 = 0 dBm
Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~
dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
1 = 0dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB
0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
1 = 0dB
Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB
mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
Selects the transmission modem start speed,

14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/
2400 bps.
Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 32.
Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
Note:
This parameter is applicable only when
communicating with regular G3 machines. When
communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
use Parameter No. 33.
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
1 = Off
2 = On
3 = Select
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (without EP Tone)
2 = On (with EP Tone)
1 = 100 ms
2 = 200 ms
3 = 500 ms
1 = Normal (Short)
2 = Long
1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)
2 = 2100 Hz
Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.

Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
when entering Phone Book Dialing
Numbers or Manual Number Dialing.
Select the ECM mode.
Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on
V.29 mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
Selects the time interval between the receiving
signal and the transmitting signal.
Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
167
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
Parameter
025 COMM. Start-Up
026 Non-Standard
027 Short Protocol B
028 Short Protocol D
029 Remote
Diagnostics
030 CED & 300 bps
031 RTC = EOL x 12
032 V34 TX Start
033 V34 RX Start
034 V34 TX SR
035 V34 RX SR
036 Not Used
037 Protocol Display
038 Not Used
039 Flash Time
040 Flash Time
(PSTN)
041 Pause Time
042 Not Used
043 Redial Interval

Selections
Function
1 = First
Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
2 = Second
and Polling).
1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects the short protocol mode.
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (Invalid)
Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
2 = On (Valid)
allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
1 = Off (will not accept)
Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
2 = On (accepts)
Diagnostics from the service station.
1 = 75 ms
Selects the pause interval between the CED and
2 = 1 sec
the 300 bps signal.
1 = Off (EOLx6)
Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
2400-33600bps
Selects the transmission modem start speed for
V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.
2400-33600bps
Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
2400-3429sr
Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
2400-3429sr
Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/
3000/2800/2400 sr.
1 = Off (not displayed)
2 = On (displayed)
Selects whether to display the modem speed

during communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
5 = 50 ms
~
100 = 1000 ms
5 = 50 ms
~
100 = 1000 ms
1 = 1 sec.
~
10 = 10 sec.
Selects the pause interval before activating the

Flash key.
0 = no waiting
~
15 = 15 minutes
Selects the pause interval before activating the

Flash key.
(For Germany, Austria and Czech)
Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
dialing through a switchboard or for international
calls.
Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
minute steps.
168
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
Parameter
044 Redial Count
045 Ring Detect

Count
046 On-Hook Time
047 Response Wait
Interval

Selections
Function
0 = no redial
Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~
intervals.
15 = 15 times
Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only)
1 = 1 ring
Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in
~
1 ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
0 = 0 sec.
Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~
communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
1 = 1 sec.
Selects the waiting interval for the response after
~
completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048~ Not Used

049
050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal
2 = Rough
051 Not Used
052 Pulse Rate
Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line

signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
1 = 10 pps
2 = 20 pps
Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
053~ Not Used

054
055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off
2 = On
056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off
(Specified
2 = On
destinations only)
057 DC Loop Check 1 = Off
(Specified
2 = On
destinations only)
058 Comm. JRNL +
1 = Off (without image)
Image
2 = On (with image)
059 Confidential RCV 1 = Off (does not print out)
Report
2 = On (prints out)
060 Version
Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:******
RX:****** CPY:******
062 Print Counter
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.

Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing
the telephone number.
Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
communication.
Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
Journal with image.
Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
RCV Report.
Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and

copied document count.
Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063~ Not Used

067
169
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
Parameter
068 NYSE Fax
Forward
(USA and Canada
Only)
069 NYSE Local Print

(USA and Canada
Only)
070 Line Error
071 Total Error
072 Continuous Error
073 Error Detect

074 RTN Receive
075 Coding

Selections
Function
1 = Off
Selects whether the machine will forward the
2 = On
incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
Note:
Once this parameter is activated, Fax
Forwarding via Fax Parameter 054 is
automatically disabled, an Access Code of
"0000" is automatically assigned and Fax
Parameter 038 has a new setting added called
"NYSE".
1 = Inc
Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
2 = On (Always)
after FAX Forwarding.
INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
ON : Always prints.
128 lines
1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
256 lines
reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
512 lines
setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
1024 line
2048 lines
2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or
Off
RTN/PIN.
(will not disconnect line)
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES")
(See Note 1)
1 = 5%
Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10%
PIN.
3 = 15%
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20%
(See Note 2)
1 = Off (unlimited)
Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6
2 = 3 lines/STD
or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total
3 = 6 lines/STD
error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit
4 = 12 lines/STD
RTN/PIN.
(Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
1 = Lines
Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
2 = Rate
1 = Disconnect
Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue
continue when "RTN" is received.
1 = MH (MH only)
Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
4 = JBIG
1 = Off
Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
2 = On
076 Batch TX
(USA and Canada
Only)
077 RX JAM Length
1 = Off (unlimited)
2=2m
078~ Not Used
079
080 Doc Top Feed
-99
~
+99
081 Doc End Feed
-90
~
+127
Selects the maximum length of a received

document that can be printed.
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor

ON position and the scanning start position.
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
OFF position and the scanning end position.
170
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
No.
Parameter
082 JAM Length

Selections
Function
1=1m
Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m
be scanned.
083 Not Used

084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring)
2 = Busy (keep line busy)
085~
086
087
088
089
090~
091
092
093 ~
094
095
096 ~
101
102
Not Used
Darker Level
Normal Level
Lighter Level
Not Used
0 = Lightest Contrast
~
15 = Darkest Contrast
Selects the contrast level.

0
15
Lightest Darkest
Smoothing
1 = Off
2 = On
Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
Reduction Ratio
Not Used
(70-100)
Selects Print Reduction Ratio(%).
Book Top Feed
-30
~
+30
-9
~
0
Adjustment of original registration detection timing.
Not Used
103 Book End Feed

104~
109
110
111
112
Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the

remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
Not Used
MAC Address
Not Used
Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off
2 = On
113~ Not Used

114
115 Time Zone
116 Overwrite
Warning
1 = Scroll
2 = Direct
1 = Yes
2 = No
Indicates the MAC Address.

Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
Selects the setting method for Time Zone.

Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll
through the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone
directly, (*) key to be used as a switch
between +/-.
Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.
171
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006

Selections
No.
Parameter
117~ Not Used
121
122 LDAP
1 = Off
2 = On
123 One Ring Sound 1 = Off
(USA and Canada 2 = On
Only)
(Effective from Sept. 2004
Production)
124 ~ Not Used
199
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Function
When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be

displayed as different characters.
When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect
Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is
enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out
loud, answering on the second ring count.
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station".
The last Program Key will be assigned with the Store 4 Poll Key name automatically
and cannot be changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen
and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will
not be accepted.)
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN
1:128
0-31
32-63
64-127
2:256
0-63
64-127
128-255
Setting
3:512
4:1024
0-127
0-255
128-255
256-511
256-511
512-1023
5:2048
0-511
512-1023
1024-2047
6:Off
Always
-
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN
1:5%
0-2
3-4
5-
Setting
2:10%
3:15%
0-4
0-7
5-9
8-14
1015-
4:20%
0-9
10-19
20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the countrys specifications or regulations. Print the
Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
172
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.
Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1.
Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.

Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display.
Press the SET key.
Press the SET key to select the "1:Function Parameter List".
Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
173
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
Mon/Tel Dial:[Monitor] Monitor

Alarm Status:[Timer] Timer
Stop Comm. JRNL:[On] On
Continuous Polling:[Off] Off
Numeric ID Set:[On] On
Destination Code:[999] 999
ID Display:[Chara] Chara
JRNL Column:[Station] Station
Monitor:[Off] Off
DC Loop:[Off] Off
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
Ring Det Mode:[Normal] Normal

---------Pulse Rate:[10pps] 10pps
------------------Busy Tone Check:[On] On
------------------Comm.JRNL +Image:[On] On
Conf.RCV Report:[On] On
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
TX Level:[-11dBm] -11dBm
RX Level:[-43dBm] -43dBm
DTMF Level:[-5dBm] -5dBm
G3 RX EQL:[0dB] 0dB
G3 TX EQL:[0dB] 0dB
----------------TX Start:[14400bps] 14400bps
RX Start:[14400bps] 14400bps
ITU-T V.34:[On] On
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
Version: UF-9000 AAV......

TX/RX/PRT/CPY: 000080/000168/000003/000000
Print Counter:[Off] Off
---------------------------------------------NYSE Fax Forward:[Off] Off
NYSE Local Print:[inc] inc
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
ITU-T ECM:[On] On
EP Tone:[Off] Off
Sig. Interval:[500ms] 500ms
TCF Check:[Normal] Normal
CED Freq.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz
Comm. Start-Up:[1'st] 1'st
Non-Standard:[On] On
Short Protocol B:[On] On
Short Protocol D:[On] On
Remote Diag.:[On] On
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
Line Error:[128] 128

Total Error:[10] 10
Conti. Error:[Off] Off
Error Detect:[Rate] Rate
RTN Receive:[Discon] Discon
Coding:[JBIG] JBIG
Batch TX:[On] On
RX JAM Length:[2 m] 2 m
-------------------
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms

RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off
V34TX Start:[33600bps] 33600bps
V34RX Start:[33600bps] 33600bps
V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr
V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr
--------Protocol Display:[Off] Off
--------Flash Time:[500ms] 500ms
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
Doc Top Feed:[0] 0

Doc End Feed:[0] 0
JAM Length:[2 m] 2 m
---------Line As Nopaper:[Ring] Ring
------------------Darker Level:[2] 2
Normal Level:[8] 8
Lighter Level:[14] 14
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
--------Pause Time:[3sec] 3sec

--------Redial Interval:[3min] 3min
Redial Count:[5] 5
Ring Det. Count:[2] 2
On-Hook Time:[5sec] 5sec
Response Wait:[5sec] 55sec
-----------------
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
------------------Smoothing:[On] On
------------------Reduction Ratio:[100%] 100%
-------------------------------------
Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
-PANASONIC
*****
******************* -PANASONIC
- ****** -12345678901234567890- *********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations.
2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
174
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
------------------Book Top Feed:[0] 0

Book End Feed:[0] 0
-------------------------------------------------------
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
MAC Address: 080023000177

---------Insert EMAIL TXT:[Off] Off
---------Symbol set:[Std] Std
Time Zone:[Direct] Direct
Overwrite Warning:[Yes] Yes
----------------------------
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
------------------LDAP:[On] On
----------------------------------------------------------------
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
-PANASONIC
*****
****************** -PANASONIC
- ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations.
2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
175
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following
procedure.
Press the SET key.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Page Memory Test".
Press the SET key.
************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
SC
:
SC BOOT
:
PNL
:
PRINTER
:
SPC(SCANNER) :
FAX MODEM
:
SC2
:
TX/RX/PRT/CPY
MEMORY SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
SHIPMENT SET
: 000123/000456/000789/000666
: (2 MB)
: 08002300E078
-PANASONIC
*****
****************** -PANASONIC
- ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
176
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
Press the SET key.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: Printer Report".
Press the SET key.
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR
: MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00
SERIAL NUMBER
CUSTOMER ID
:
: 1234567890123456
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
PNL
SPC (SCANNER)
PRINTER
:
:
:
:
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
:
:
:
:
00-00000016
000475
000398
000083
000016
ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT

NO.DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT | NO.DATE & TIME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00
00-00000016 |
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02
00-00000016 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC
*****
*******************-PANAFAX
-*******-12345678901234567890-**************
177
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.

Press the SET key.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "5: All Document Files".
Press the SET key.
178
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.

Press the V, /\ arrow keys select the "6: Protocol Trace".
Press the SET key.
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS
MODE
SPEED
REMOTE CAPA.
LOCAL CAPA.
:
:
:
:
:
OK
ECM-TX (STANDARD)
9600bps 0MS/L
DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE
: NSF
CSI
DIS
CFR
LOCAL
:
TSI
DCS
PIX
PPS-EOP
-----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE
: MCF
LOCAL
:
DCN
-PANASONIC
****************************-PANASONIC
-*************-12345678901234567890-***************
179
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.4.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Toner Order Form
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "7: Toner Order Form".
Press the SET key.
180
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
*************************************
>
TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone:
by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (3)

1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)
P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Cartridge No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
The toner supply in your machine is running low
(2) Dealer Name
Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Cartridge No.
Refer to the Supply list
181
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.5.
5.2.5.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)

Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display.
Press the SET key to select the "1: Signal Test".
Press the SET key.
Press the desired number.
Press the SET key.

Binary Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signals
V21 300bps
V27ter 2400bps
V27ter 4800bps
V29 7200bps
V29 9600bps
V17 TC7200bps
V17 TC9600bps
V17 12000bps
V17 14400bps
182
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.5.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Press the SET key to select the "2: Tonal Test".
Press the SET key.
Press the desired number and press the "START" key.

Tonal Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signals
462 Hz
1080 Hz
1100 Hz
1300 Hz
1650 Hz
1850 Hz
2100 Hz
183
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.5.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
DTMF Single Tone
Press the SET key to select the "3: DTMF Test".
Press the SET key.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "1. Single".

DTMF Dual Tone
Press the SET key to select the "3: DTMF Test".
Press the SET key.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "2. Dual".

DTMF Single Tone Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTMF Dual Tone Table
DTMF Signal Tones

697 Hz
770 Hz
852 Hz
941 Hz
1209 Hz
1336 Hz
1477 Hz
1633 Hz
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
DTMF Dual Tones

941 Hz + 1336 Hz
697 Hz + 1209 Hz
697 Hz + 1336 Hz
697 Hz + 1477 Hz
770 Hz + 1209 Hz
770 Hz + 1336 Hz
770 Hz + 1477 Hz
852 Hz + 1209 Hz
852 Hz + 1336 Hz
852 Hz + 1477 Hz
941 Hz + 1209 Hz
941 Hz + 1477 Hz
184
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.5.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)
Press the SET key to select the "4: V34 MODEM".
Press the SET key.

Binary Signal Table
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Signals
V34 2400 sr 2400 bps
V34 2400 sr 4800 bps
V34 2400 sr 7200 bps
V34 2400 sr 9600 bps
V34 2400 sr 12000 bps
V34 2400 sr 14400 bps
V34 2400 sr 16800 bps
V34 2400 sr 19200 bps
V34 2400 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 4800 bps
V34 2800 sr 7200 bps
V34 2800 sr 9600 bps
V34 2800 sr 12000 bps
V34 2800 sr 14400 bps
V34 2800 sr 16800 bps
V34 2800 sr 19200 bps
V34 2800 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 24000 bps
V34 2800 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 4800 bps
V34 3000 sr 7200 bps
Number
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Signals
V34 3000 sr 9600 bps
V34 3000 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 14400 bps
V34 3000 sr 16800 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3000 sr 21600 bps
V34 3000 sr 24000 bps
V34 3000 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 4800 bps
V34 3200 sr 7200 bps
V34 3200 sr 9600 bps
V34 3200 sr 12000 bps
V34 3200 sr 14400 bps
V34 3200 sr 16800 bps
V34 3200 sr 19200 bps
V34 3200 sr 21600 bps
V34 3200 sr 24000 bps
V34 3200 sr 26400 bps
V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
Number
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Signals
V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
V34 3429 sr 7200 bps
V34 3429 sr 9600 bps
V34 3429 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 16800 bps
V34 3429 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
V34 3429 sr 24000 bps
V34 3429 sr 26400 bps
V34 3429 sr 28800 bps
V34 3429 sr 31200 bps
V34 3429 sr 33600 bps
ANSam
CM
JM
INFO0c & TONEB
INFO0c & TONEA
PPh & AC & ALT
185
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.6.
Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "6: RAM initialize" on the display.
Press the SET key to select the desired Mode number.
Press the "SET" key to initialize RAM.

RAM Initialization Table
No.
01
Initialize Mode
PARAMETER INITIALIZE
02
03
04
05
06
07
JOURNAL CLEAR
AUTO DIAL CLEAR
PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR
LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR
LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR
SHIPMENT SET
08
09
FLASH MEMORY CLEAR

ALL JOB CLEAR
Description
Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the
ON position to enable the parameter settings.
Clears the Journal contents.
Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
Clears the Program keys.
Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
Clears the Printer Error Log.
Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
186
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.7.
5.2.7.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)

Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machines printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "08 Check & Call" on the display.
Press the SET key to select the desired code number.

(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"
Mode key and input the email address.)
5.2.7.2.
Printer Reports
Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted

1. Manual print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic transmission/printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
c. Toner Order Form
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information.
d. Call Counter Report
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
187
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Error
Code
Ex-xx
E13
Jxx
Uxx
U13
Log
O
Tx
Remarks
Report
S
Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.3.)
Out of Toner.
Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.2.)
Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.1.)
M
Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
188
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.7.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

****************************
>
SERVICE ALERT REPORT
<
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR
(1) CUSTOMER ID
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SPC
: MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013
: ABC COMPANY
:
:
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:

F7-02 Total Count
PM COUNT
Scanner PM Count
ADF Count
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
Developer Count
Corona Cleaning Count
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up
Total OPC Rotation Time
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
CURRENT
13
13
9
1
13
13
1
:
:
:
:
:
13
13
1.00
0.03
0.01
:
:
:
0
3
10
PM CYCLE
240000
(------)
(------)
----------(------)
:
:
:
CURRENT
0
3
10
F7-04 ADF Count

ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
F7-05 Copy Print Count

Copy Scan Count
:
:
3
4
F7-06 PC Print Count

PC Scan Count
:
:
0
6
F7-07 FAX Transmit Count

FAX Receive Count
FAX Print Count
:
:
:
0
0
0
2-Sided Count
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
(4) PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01
00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC
*****
*********************** -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error
Last 30 records (Latest on top)
189
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.7.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

CUSTOMER ID
: ABC COMPANY (2)
(3)
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
:
SPC
:
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
:
:
:
:
000244
000082
000000
000000
(4)
NO.DATE & TIME

NO.DATE & TIME
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC
************************************ -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER
(2) Customer ID

(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
5.2.7.5.
Toner Order Form
190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
*************************************
>
TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone:
by Fax:
1 201 111 5555 (3)

1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)
P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Cartridge No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Signature & Date
The toner supply in your machine is running low
(2) Dealer Name
Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel #
Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax #
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
(6) Toner Cartridge No.
Refer to the Supply list
191
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.7.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CALL COUNTER REPORT

*****************************************************************
>
SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE
<
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR
: MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013
(1) CUSTOMER ID
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SPC
: ABC COMPANY
:
:
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:

PM COUNT
Scanner PM Count
ADF Count
OPC Drum Count
Process Unit Count
ADF PM Count
Fuser Web Count
Developer Count
Corona Cleaning Count
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up
Total OPC Rotation Time
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up
CURRENT
:
13
:
9
:
1
:
13
:
13
:
1
: 240986
:
13
:
13
:
1.00
:
0.03
:
0.01
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count

3rd Paper Tray Count
4th Paper Tray Count
:
:
:
:
:
0
3
10
0
0
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
14000
PM CYCLE
(------)
(------)
----------(------)
:
:
:
:
CURRENT
3
10
0
0
F7-04 ADF Count

ADF Read Count
Scanner Count
Scanner Read Count
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
F7-05 Copy Print Count

Copy Scan Count
:
:
3
4
F7-06 PC Print Count

PC Scan Count
:
:
0
6
F7-07 FAX Transmit Count

FAX Receive Count
FAX Print Count
:
:
:
0
0
0
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
A3/LEDGER Count
B4/LEGAL Count
PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01
00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC
*****
*********************** -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
192
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
5.2.8.
Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "9: System Maintenance" on the display.
Press the SET key to select the "1: Send RCVD File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
Select the desired Fax number.
Press "START" to send the Fax.

After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.
Note:
If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.
System Maintenance Table
No.
Maintenance Mode
01 Send RCV'D File
Description
Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
193
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6 System Description
6.1.
Scanning / Transmit Mechanism
The transmit mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send
signals. These components and their functions are as follows:
6.1.1.
ADF Mechanism
The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF roller
and separation rubber. The document is placed face up on the Document Tray before being fed into the
unit. The ADF Roller feeds individual pages into the scanning area.
The Separation Rubber separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding.
6.1.2.
Transmit Guide Unit
The transmit guide unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the
Transmit Guide, Control Panel Chassis, Feed Roller, Eject Roller, and Eject Pinch Roller and Feed Pinch
Roller. This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference.
6.1.3.
Transmit Mechanism Drive System

This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a
stepper motor.
The Motor, a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF roller, feed roller and eject roller, with the
speed based on the density of the picture information.
The Feed Roller feeds the document to the scanning point and ejects the document out of the machine.
6.1.4.
Verification Stamp Unit
6.1.5.
Scanner Block
The verification stamp unit stamps the "X" mark on the face of the document after the document is
successfully transmitted or stored.
The scanner block consists of four mirrors, a Lens and a CCD PC Board.
194
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
The mirrors, Mirror 1 and Mirror 2, reflect image information in the form of light through the Lens.
The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD.
The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC board, converts the image information into the electronic signals.
6.1.6.
6.2.
Drive System
Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board and LCD Unit, which displays the various status
messages, and a hard key-type panel.
195
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.
6.3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Printer / Receive Mechanism

Component Layout and Paper Path
196
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Print Process
6.3.2.1.
Charge
6.3.2.2.
Exposure
The charge corona applies a high, uniform positive charge to the surface of the organic photoconductor
(OPC) drum. The charge level is approximately 900 VDC and remains because the OPC drum has a high
electrical resistance when concealed in darkness.
The laser beam passes through the collimator lens, is reflected by the polygon mirror, and is focused onto
the drum after passing through an image-forming (
) lens and a reflection mirror. Wherever the laser
beam strikes the drum, the positive charge dissipates. A latent electrical image of two different voltages
potentials, which corresponds to the original page, is formed on the OPC drum.
6.3.2.3.
Development / Cleaning
Development:
Non-magnetic toner is supplied to the conductive roller by the toner supply roller. The toner on the
conductive roller is positively charged by friction with the toner supply roller, and the doctor blade ensures a
thin layer on the surface of the conductive roller. Wherever the conductive roller touches the drum, the
positively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, and the latent image is converted to a
visible toner image. A bias voltage of approx. 350 VDC is applied to the conductive roller to achieve
maximum print quality.
197
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Cleaning:
After transfer, residual toner remains on the drum surface, and for next printing, the residual toner reaches
to the development area via charge and exposure. The charge level of the OPC corresponds to the white
background is +900VDC, and the bias voltage of the conductive roller is approx. +350VDC. Therefor the
positively charged residual toner on the OPC drum is attracted and collected to the conductive roller. The
charge level of OPC after exposure is +100VDC. So, the printing area of the OPC is cleaned.
6.3.2.4.
Transfer
6.3.2.5.
Fusing
As the paper is fed between the drum and the transfer roller, a high negative charge is applied to the back
of the paper. The positive toner particles are then attracted from the drum surface to the paper. After
transfer, the paper is separated from the drum surface by the curvature of the drum.
The paper passes through the fuser rollers and is subjected to heat and pressure. The fusing temperature is
approximately 190C (374F), and the pressure is approximately 0.36kg/cm (3.53N/cm). This bonds, or
fuses, the toner into the paper.
6.3.3.
Paper Feed
Media Tray
The main motor drives the pick up roller after the pick up solenoid is energized, which engages the pick up
roller clutch and feeds a sheet of paper. The paper is pushed to the paper feed roller, which overdrives the
paper slightly causing a buckle to ensure the paper is aligned with the stationary registration roller.
While triggering the registration sensor notifying the CPU paper is ready to feed. The paper at this point is at
the same position as with manual feed.
Manual Feed
when paper is inserted, it activates the registration sensor. At the predetermined period of time, the CPU
energizes the registration solenoid that allows the registration roller to rotate, feeding paper to the Paper
Path Sensor.
198
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.4.
6.3.4.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Laser Scan Unit (Exposure)

Operation Theory
The light beam from the laser diode (light source) is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and
converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then sent to the rotating polygon mirror
(polygon scanner), where it is reflected through the
lens and then focused onto the OPC drum surface.
The diameter of the beam is about 80 m, and the light moves across the surface of the OPC drum in the
scanning direction of right to left. As the drum rotates (sub-scans), a static image is formed where the laser
beam touches the drum surface.
The laser beam is also deflected to the timing sensor. This sensor controls the start timing of scanning on
the drum, providing a consistent left margin. The CPU uses the timing sensor to detect abnormal signals.
6.3.4.2.
Laser Beam
The laser beam is pulsed on and off by the digital signal (nVIDEO) to form a latent image of two different
voltage potentials on the drum, as shown below.
Laser Diode Specification

Item
Oscillation Wavelength
Output Light Power
(OPC Drum Surface)
Minimum
770
0.315
Standard
785
0.350
Maximum
800
0.385
nm
mW
199
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.4.3.
Collimator Lens
6.3.4.4.
Polygon Scanner
UF-9000
DP-180/190
The collimator lens converts light from the laser diode to parallel light. This aids in scanning and provides
better convergence to a dot.
The polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror directly driven by a brushless DC motor at a rate
20,078.74 rpm. The laser beam is reflected across the OPC drum by the mirror faces and produces the
scan. One mirror face is equal to one main scan. This unit features stable line scanning speed, precision
mirror surface reflection angle, reflect-free surfaces, and instant start.
Polygon Scanner Specifications
Item
Mirror
Revolution
6.3.4.5.
Cylindrical Lens and
Specification
6
20,078.74
faces
rpm
Lens
Each of the polygon mirror surfaces has a slight imperfection. This prevents the beam from scanning the
OPC drum surface at the constant interval in the sub-scan direction. The cylindrical lens and
used for correcting this uneven laser scanning.
6.3.4.6.
lens are
Lens
This lens ensures that the beam scans across the surface of the OPC drum at a constant rate. The beam is
refracted to parallel light as it passes through the lens to ensure that the dots at the edge of the drum and at
the center of the drum are equally spaced. This lens also provides a set focal length for laser beam.
Specifications
Item
Scanning Width
Focusing Light Spot Size
6.3.4.7.
Specification
207.43
80 x 90
mm
m
Timing Sensor
This sensor detects the laser beam and determines the start timing for scanning. A pin photodiode is used
as the timing sensor.
200
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Fuser Unit
A 600W heat lamp (halogen lamp) heats the surface of the teflon-coated heat roller to approximately 190C
(374F), a thermistor monitors the heat roller temperature, and the CPU controls the ON/OFF timing of the
lamp.
The thermostat is mounted 2.5mm away from the heat roller. If the ambient temperature reaches 190C
(374F), the thermostat is opened, and power is removed from the heat lamp. The surface of the
thermostat is not as hot as that of the heat roller. When the thermostat opens, the surface of the heat roller
may reach 210C (410F), and the system displays E4-01. If the thermistor opens, the system displays
E4-01. If by chance the thermostat malfunctions a thermal fuse opens.
The pressure roller is kept in contact with the heat roller through 2 pressure springs, which apply a pressure
of approximately 0.36 kg/cm (3.56 N/cm). Drive is supplied from the main motor via intermediate gears.
201
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.3.6.
Paper Ejection and Paper Switchback
UF-9000
DP-180/190
A. Normal Printing Mode (Not Duplex Mode)

After fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper
Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined
period of time, Jam at A is displayed, and if paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period,
Jam at B is displayed on the computer screen. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.
B. Duplex Mode
After fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper
Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined
period of time, Jam at A is displayed on the computer screen. At the specified time after the sensor
detects the bottom of paper, the Exit Roller rotates in reverse direction, turning ON the Exit solenoid to
move the ratchet lever to Duplex Position. As a result, the paper is fed to the development area through the
Auto Duplex Unit (ADU). If paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period, Jam at E is
displayed. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.
202
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.
6.4.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Signal Name
Function
+12V
+12 VDC Power Supply
+24V
+24VIR
+24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW
+3.3V
+3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5V(LD)
+5 VDC through Process Interlock SW
+5VB
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5VP
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5VSP
+5 VDC Energy Saver Control
+ACT
ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply
+ALM
ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply
+DAT
DATA Lamp LED Power Supply
+SLP
Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply
24VGND
Ground
5VGND
Ground
A
2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal
ADCLK
A/D Sample Clock Input for 3-Channels Mode
ADF_CLUCH-2
ADF Clutch Control Signal
ADF_COVER-2
ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
ADF_MOTER_MODE-2 ADF Motor Mode Control Signal
ADF_ON_LINE
ADF Detection Signal
ADF_PAPER-S1-2
ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal
ADF_PAPER-S2-2
ADF Registration Sensor Signal
ADF_PAPER-S3-2
ADF Sensor Signal
ADF_STAMP-2
ADF STAMP Control Signal
ADFPH0-1
ADF Motor Control Signal
ADFPH1-1
ADFPH2-1
ADFPH3-1
AFE-SCK
Clock Input for Serial Interface
AFE-SDI
Serial Data Input/Output
AFE-SEN
Serial Interface Load Pulse
ATA0
HDD Address Signal
ATA1
HDD Address Signal
ATA2
HDD Address Signal
ATAINT
HDD Interruption Signal
ATCS0
Master HDD Select Signal
ATCS1
Slave HDD Select Signal
ATD0
HDD Data Signal
ATD1
HDD Data Signal
ATD10
HDD Data Signal
ATD11
HDD Data Signal
203
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name
ATD12
ATD13
ATD14
ATD15
ATD2
ATD3
ATD4
ATD5
ATD6
ATD7
ATD8
ATD9
ATIORD
ATIORDY
ATIOWR
ATRST
B
BAT+
BZCLK
C1C1+
C2C2+
C3+
C4+
CCD-CK1
CCD-CK2
CCD-CP
CCD-RS
CCD-TG
CCLK
CDSCLK1
CDSCLK2
CLOCK_OP
CSB1
CXD
DD+
DASP
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6

Function
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Signal
HDD Data Read Signal
HDD Read / Write Ready Signal
HDD Data Write Signal
HDD Reset Signal
Lithium Battery
Buzzer Signal Output
Capacitor 1 Negative Connection Pin for Converter
Capacitor 1 Positive Connection Pin for Converter
Capacitor 2 Negative Connection Pin for Converter
Image Data Transmission Clock
Image Data Transmission Clock
Clamp Gate Signal
Reset Gate Signal
Shift Gate Signal
Serial I/F Clock
CDS Reference Clock Signal
CDS Data Clock Signal
CLOCK
Chip Select Signal
Serial Data Command
USB Data Signal
USB Data Signal
HDD Active Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
UF-9000
DP-180/190
204
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name
DB7
E_RDB
EBC3A[20]
EBC3A[21]
EBC3A[22]
EBC3A[23]
EBC3A[24]
EBC3A[25]
EBC3A[26]
EBC3A[27]
EBC3A[28]
EBC3A[29]
EBC3A[30]
EBC3A[31]
EBC3D[0]
EBC3D[1]
EBC3D[2]
EBC3D[3]
EBC3D[4]
EBC3D[5]
EBC3D[6]
EBC3D[7]
EXITSOL_CTL
FANNERR
FANPWR
GLA
GLK(GND)
GND
HOME
HPMB
INV-SW-1
IO16
KCCNT
KIN0
KIN1
KIN2
KIN3
KIN4
KIN5
KIN6
KIN7
LED0
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4

Function
Data Signal
Read/Write Execution Control Signal
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Address Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
System Data Bus
Exit Solenoid Control
Fan Error Detection Signal
+24 VDC Fan Power
LED Control Signal
Ground
Ground
Home Position Detection Signal
LCD Driver Power Control Signal
Inverter Control Signal
16-bit Transmission Control Signal
Mechanical Counter Detect Signal
PNL Key Signal (Key Line)
PNL LED Control Signal
UF-9000
DP-180/190
205
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LEDCT0
LEDCT1
LEDCT2
LEDCT3
LEDCT4
MODE-SW
N.C.
n5VMTON
NA
nADUST
nAPNT
NB
nBECOE
nBOOK
NCBSY
nCHGCTL
nCSMON
nDB
nDBCH
nEBCWBE[0]
nEXITSEN
nFCTL
nFXBSET
nFXBWUP
nHKOF5V
nHSYNC
nLDON
nLEDACT
nLEDALM
nLEDAT
nLEDSLP
nLPOW1
nMDMINT
nMDMRST
nMMCTL
nMMHALF
nMMLD
nMOEN_OP
nMPOW1
nMVOL0
nMVOL1

Function
Scan Mode Select Signal
No Connection
Monitor ON / OFF Select Signal
LSU APC Timing
ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal
Read Control Signal
ADF Open / Close Detection Signal
Busy Command
HVPS Charge Control (ON/OFF)
Modem Chip Select Signal
Developer (+ Voltage PWM Pulse)
Developer Charge (+/- Change)
Write Control Signal
EXIT Sensor Signal
Fuser ON/OFF Control
FXB Detection Signal
Wake Up Signal
Off-Hook Detection Signal
Horizontal Sync Signal
LD Light Enable
ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal
ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal
DATA Lamp LED Control Signal
Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal
+5 VDC Power Supply Return Signal
Modem Interruption Signal
Modem Reset Signal
Main Motor Control Signal
Motor Rotation Speed Control
Main Motor Rotation Signal
Power Supply Control Signal
Monitor Volume Control Signal
UF-9000
DP-180/190
206
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name
nMVOL2
nOPTION
nPON_OP
NPRDY
NPRINT
nPUCTL_OP
NPURGE
nREGSEN
NRES
NSBSY
nSCNDOR
nSCNRST
nSLPKY
nSNRCLK
nSNRCTL
nSNRLD
nTESEN
NTOP
nTOPSEN
nTR
nTRCTL
NVIDEO
nVIDEO
nWAKEUP
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
pCMLD
PNLRXD
PNLTXD
PNON
pPNLRST
PS
PSAVE
PUSOL_CTL
PUSOL_CTL1
REGSOL_CTL
RESETB
RS
RW_WRD
RXDRXD+
SCN[0]
SCN[1]
SCN[10]

Function
2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal
2nd Feeder No Paper Detection Signal
Printer Ready
Print Start
2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control
Paper End Detection Signal
REGISTRATION Sensor Signal
Printer Reset
Busy Status
ADF Open / Close Detection Signal
Scanner Reset Signal
Energy Saver Key Signal
LSU Motor Clock
LSU Motor Control Signal
LSU Motor Lock Signal
Low Toner Sensor Signal
Paper Top Detection Signal
Paper Detect Sensor Signal
Transfer (- Voltage PWM Pulse)
HVPS Transfer Control (+/- Change)
Video Data
Video Signal
Wake Up Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
Motor Drive Signal
CML ON / OFF Select Signal
PNL Reception Data Signal
PNL Transmission Data Signal
No Paper Sensor Signal
PNL Reset Signal
Parallel / Serial Data Input Select Signal
Power Save Control Signal
Pick Up Solenoid Control
Registration Solenoid Control
LCD Driver Reset Signal
Register Selection Control Signal
Read/Write Execution Control Signal
LAN Receiving Data
LAN Receiving Data
PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
207
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name
SCN[11]
SCN[2]
SCN[3]
SCN[4]
SCN[5]
SCN[6]
SCN[7]
SCN[8]
SCN[9]
SXD
TH
TXDTXD+
V0
V1
V2
V3
V4
VBUS
Vc1
VCC
VCDS
VCNT
VDD
VINA
VINX
VOUT
VOUTA
VOUTB
VOUTX
VSS
VTED
WEBSOL
X1
X2
Y1
Y2
YLA
YLK(GND)
ZCIN

Function
Serial Data Status
Fuser Thermistor Signal
LAN Transmission Data
LAN Transmission Data
LCD Driver Supply Voltages
+5 VDC Power Supply
LCD Driver Reference Voltage
+5 VDC Power Supply
Density Sensor ON
Sensor Input Signal
Sensor Input Signal
Voltage Converter Input / Output
Sensor Control Signal
Ground
Toner Detect Sensor ON
Web Solenoid Control Signal
Touch Panel Matrix Signal
LED Control Signal
Ground
Zero Crossing Signal
UF-9000
DP-180/190
208
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SC PC Board
CN300
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN300-1
CN300-2
CN300-3
CN300-4
Signal Name
+24V
+24V
+24V
GND
Destination
LVPS
CN101-1
LVPS
CN101-2
LVPS
CN101-3
Signal Waveform
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
Function
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
LVPS
CN101-4
Ground
0V
CN300-5
GND
LVPS
CN101-5
Ground
0V
CN300-6
CN300-7
CN300-8
+5V
+5V
GND
LVPS
CN101-6
LVPS
CN101-7
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Sleep Mode
+5 VDC Power Supply
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Sleep Mode
+5 VDC Power Supply
Shutdown
Mode
0V
LVPS
CN101-8
Ground
0V
CN300-9
+3.3V
CN300-10 +3.3V
LVPS
CN101-9
LVPS
CN101-10
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
209
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN300-11 GND
LVPS
CN101-11
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN300-12 +5VP
LVPS
CN101-12
CN300-13 GND
LVPS
CN101-13
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN300-14 nMPOW1
CN300-15 nFCTL
CN300-16 N.C.
LVPS
CN101-14
LVPS
CN101-15
Power
Saving
+5V
Heater
ON
+5V
Power Supply Control

Signal
0V
0V
LVPS
CN101-16
No Connection
CN301
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN301-1
CN301-2
Signal Name
nFCTL
5VGND
Destination
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-1
+5V
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-3
CN301-4
24VGND
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-4
24VGND
Heater
ON
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-2
CN301-3
CN301-5
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
0V
Ground
0V
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-5
Ground
0V
210
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN301-6
+24V
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-6
CN301-7
+24V
Engine Control
PCB
CN005-7
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +24V
Shutdown
0V
CN302
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN302-1
CN302-2
Signal Name
+24V
KCCNT
Destination
Mechanical
Counter
Signal Waveform
+24V
+24V
Mechanical
Counter
Function
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Counter +3.3V
Mount
0V
Mechanical Counter Detect

Signal
CN304
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN304-1
+24V
SPC PCB
P102-1
CN304-2
+24V
SPC PCB
P102-2
CN304-3
GND
SPC PCB
P102-3
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +24V
Shutdown
0V
Ground
0V
CN304-4
GND
SPC PCB
P102-4
Ground
0V
CN304-5
+12V
SPC PCB
P102-5
CN304-6
GND
SPC PCB
P102-6
Sleep & +12V

Shutdown
0V
Ground
0V
211
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN304-7
+5V
SPC PCB
P102-7
CN304-8
+5VP
SPC PCB
P102-8
CN304-9
Signal Name
nBOOK
Destination
Signal Waveform
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
+5V
SPC PCB
P102-10
CN304-11 nSCNRST
SPC PCB
P102-11
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
Sleep &
Shudown
SPC PCB
P102-9
CN304-10 nAPNT
Function
ADF
Closed
Doc. ON
+3.3V
ADF Open / Close

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
+5V
Reset
ADF Paper Detection

Sensor Signal
Scanner Reset Signal
0V
CN305
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN305-1
Signal Name
VBUS
Destination
Signal Waveform
SPC PCB
P101-1
CN305-2
D-
SPC PCB
P101-2
CN305-3
D+
SPC PCB
P101-3
CN305-4
GND
SPC PCB
P101-4
Function
+5V
Ping
+5 VDC Power Supply
0V
3.3V
0.4V
0V
3.3V
0.4V
0V
USB D-
USB D+
Ground
0V
CN306
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN306-1
Signal Name
+24V
Destination
PNL1 PCB
CN220-1
Signal Waveform
+24V
+24V
Sleep Mode
Function
Shutdown
Mode
0V
212
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN306-2
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
PNL1 PCB
CN220-2
Ground
0V
CN306-3
GND
PNL1 PCB
CN220-3
Ground
0V
CN306-4
GND
PNL1 PCB
CN220-4
Ground
0V
CN306-5
+5VP
PNL1 PCB
CN220-5
CN306-6
+5V
PNL1 PCB
CN220-6
CN306-7
PNLRXD
PNL1 PCB
CN220-7
+5V
+5V
+5V
Sleep Mode
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
Shutdown
Mode
0V
PNL Reception Data Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN306-8
PNLTXD
PNL1 PCB
CN220-8
PNL Transmission Data

Signal
+3.3V
0V
CN306-9
pPNLRST
PNL1 PCB
CN220-9
+3.3V
RESET
CN306-10 BZCLK
PNL1 PCB
CN220-10
PNL Reset Signal
0V
+3.3V
0V
CN306-11 nLPOW1
PNL1 PCB
CN220-11
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply

Return Signal
0V
CN306-12 nSLPKY
PNL1 PCB
CN220-12
+3.3V
PRESSED
0V
213
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN306-13 nWAKEUP
PNL1 PCB
CN220-13
CN306-14 GND
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Energy
Saving
Function
+5V
Wake UP
Wake Up Signal
0V
PNL1 PCB
CN220-14
Ground
0V
CN306-15 GND
PNL1 PCB
CN220-15
Ground
0V
CN306-16 nBOOK
PNL1 PCB
CN220-16
ADF
Closed
+3.3V
ADF Open / Close

Detection Signal
0V
CN308
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN308-1
Signal Name
NTOP
Destination
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-24
CN308-2
ZCIN
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-23
CN308-3
NSBSY
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-22
CN308-4
CN308-5
CN308-6
CN308-7
GND
NVIDEO
GND
NHSYNC
Signal Waveform
Paper
Top
Detection
Function
+5V
Paper Top Detection Signal
0V
Zero Crossing Signal
+5V
Busy Status
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-21
Ground
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-20
+5V
Video Data
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-19
Ground
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-18
+5V
Horizontal Synchronization
0V
214
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN308-8
CN308-9
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
NRES
NPURGE
CN308-10 GND
CN308-11 CXD
CN308-12 GND
CN308-13 CCLK
CN308-14 GND
CN308-15 SXD
CN308-16 GND
CN308-17 NPRINT
Destination
Signal Waveform
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-17
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-16
+5V
Reset
Paper
End
Detection
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-15
Paper End Detection Signal
0V
Serial Data Command
0V
Ground
0V
+5V
Serial I/F Clock
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-11
Ground
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-10
+5V
Serial Data Status
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-9
Ground
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-8
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-6
+5V
+5V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-12
CN308-19 NCBSY
0V
0V
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-13
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-7
Printer Reset
Ground
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-14
CN308-18 N.C.
Function
Print
Start
+5V
Print Start
0V
No Connection
+5V
Command
Busy Command
0V
215
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN308-20 N.C.
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-5
CN308-21 NPRDY
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
No Connection
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-4
+5V
Printer
Ready
Printer Ready
0V
CN308-22 N.C.
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-3
No Connection
CN308-23 ZCIN
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-2
No Connection
CN308-24 PSAVE
Engine Control
PCB
CN001-1
Energy
Save
+5V
Power Save Control Signal
0V
CN309
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN309-1
Signal Name
ATRST
Destination
HDD I/F
Signal Waveform
GND
HDD Reset Signal
+5V
0V
CN309-2
Function
RESET
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-3
ATD7
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-4
ATD8
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-5
ATD6
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-6
ATD9
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
216
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN309-7
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
ATD5
Destination
Signal Waveform
HDD I/F
Function
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-8
ATD10
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-9
ATD4
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-10 ATD11
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-11 ATD3
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-12 ATD12
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-13 ATD2
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-14 ATD13
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-15 ATD1
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-16 ATD14
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-17 ATD0
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
217
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN309-18 ATD15
HDD I/F
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
HDD Data Signal
0V
CN309-19 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-20 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-21 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-22 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-23 ATIOWR
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Write Signal
0V
CN309-24 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-25 ATIORD
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Data Read Signal
0V
CN309-26 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-27 ATIORDY
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Read / Write Ready

Signal
0V
CN309-28 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-29 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
218
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN309-30 GND
HDD I/F
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN309-31 ATAINT
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Interruption Signal
0V
CN309-32 IO16
HDD I/F
+5V
16-bit Transmission Control

Signal
0V
CN309-33 ATA1
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Address Signal
0V
CN309-34 N.C.
HDD I/F
CN309-35 ATA0
HDD I/F
No Connection
+5V
HDD Address Signal
0V
CN309-36 ATA2
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Address Signal
0V
CN309-37 ATCS1
HDD I/F
+5V
Slave HDD Select Signal
0V
CN309-38 ATCS0
HDD I/F
+5V
Master HDD Select Signal
0V
CN309-39 DASP
HDD I/F
+5V
HDD Active Signal
0V
CN309-40 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
219
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN330
SC PCB
Pin No.
CN330-1
+24V
FXB PCB
CN110-1
+24V
CN330-2
+5VP
FXB PCB
CN110-2
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN330-3
GND
FXB PCB
CN110-3
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN330-4
GND
FXB PCB
CN110-4
Ground
0V
CN330-5
EBC3D[0]
FXB PCB
CN110-5
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-6
EBC3D[1]
FXB PCB
CN110-6
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-7
EBC3D[2]
FXB PCB
CN110-7
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-8
EBC3D[3]
FXB PCB
CN110-8
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-9
EBC3D[4]
FXB PCB
CN110-9
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-10 EBC3D[5]
FXB PCB
CN110-10
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-11 EBC3D[6]
FXB PCB
CN110-11
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
220
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN330-12 EBC3D[7]
FXB PCB
CN110-12
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+3.3V
System Data Bus
0V
CN330-13 EBC3A[20]
FXB PCB
CN110-13
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-14 EBC3A[21]
FXB PCB
CN110-14
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-15 EBC3A[22]
FXB PCB
CN110-15
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-16 EBC3A[23]
FXB PCB
CN110-16
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-17 EBC3A[24]
FXB PCB
CN110-17
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-18 EBC3A[25]
FXB PCB
CN110-18
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-19 EBC3A[26]
FXB PCB
CN110-19
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-20 EBC3A[27]
FXB PCB
CN110-20
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-21 EBC3A[28]
FXB PCB
CN110-21
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-22 EBC3A[29]
FXB PCB
CN110-22
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
221
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN330-23 EBC3A[30]
FXB PCB
CN110-23
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-24 EBC3A[31]
FXB PCB
CN110-24
+3.3V
System Address Bus
0V
CN330-25 nFXBSET
CN330-26 nFXBWUP
CN330-27 BZCLK
FXB PCB
CN110-25
+3.3V
FXB
Detection
FXB PCB
CN110-26
0V
+3.3V
Wake
Up
FXB Detection Signal
Wake Up Signal
0V
FXB PCB
CN110-27
+3.3V
0V
CN330-28 nEBCWBE[0] FXB PCB
CN110-28
+3.3V
Write Control Signal
0V
CN330-29 nEBCOE
FXB PCB
CN110-29
+3.3V
Output Enable
0V
CN330-30 nMDMINT
FXB PCB
CN110-30
+3.3V
Modem Interruption Signal
0V
CN330-31 nCSMON
FXB PCB
CN110-31
+3.3V
Modem Chip Select Signal
0V
CN330-32 nMDMRST
FXB PCB
CN110-32
+3.3V
Modem Reset Signal
0V
CN330-33 n5VMTON
FXB PCB
CN110-33
+5V
Monitor ON / OFF Select

Signal
0V
222
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN330-34 nMVOL0
FXB PCB
CN110-34
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
Monitor Volume Control

Signal
0V
CN330-35 nMVOL2
FXB PCB
CN110-35
+5V

Signal
0V
CN330-36 nMVOL2
FXB PCB
CN110-36
+5V

Signal
0V
CN330-37 nHKOF5V
FXB PCB
CN110-37
+5V
Off-Hook Detection Signal
0V
CN330-38 pCMLD
FXB PCB
CN110-38
+5V(H)
OFF
CN330-39 +5VB
CN330-40 +3.3V
FXB PCB
CN110-39
FXB PCB
CN110-40
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
+3.3V
ON
CML ON / OFF Select

Signal
H : CML On
0V(L) L : CML Off
Sleep Mode
+5 VDC Power Supply
Shutdown
Mode
0V
Sleep Mode
Shutdown
Mode
0V
223
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SPC PC Board
P101
Refer to SC PC Board CN305.
P102
P103
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P103-1
GND
CCD PCB
P603-1
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
P103-2
GND
CCD PCB
P603-2
Ground
0V
P103-3
+24V
CCD PCB
P603-3
P103-4
+24V
CCD PCB
P603-4
P103-5
+12V
CCD PCB
P603-5
P103-6
+12V
CCD PCB
P603-6
P103-7
VCC
CCD PCB
P603-7
P103-8
INV-SW-1
CCD PCB
P603-8
P103-9
CDSCLK2
CCD PCB
P603-1
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +24V
Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +12V
Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +12V
Shutdown
0V
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
15ns
+3.3V

(CCD)

(CCD)

(Inverter)

(Inverter)
+5 VDC Power Supply
CDS Data Clock Signal
0V
P103-10
CCD-TG
CCD PCB
P603-2
15ns
+3.3V
Shift Gate Signal
0V
224
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P103-11
GND
CCD PCB
P603-3
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
P103-12
MGND
CCD PCB
P603-4
Ground
0V
P103-13
CDSCLK1
CCD PCB
P603-5
15ns
+3.3V
CDS Reference Clock

Signal
0V
P103-14
CCD-CP
CCD PCB
P603-5
15ns
+3.3V
Clamp Gate Signal
0V
P103-15
AFE-SEN
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
0V
P103-16
CCD-CK2
CCD PCB
P603-5
60ns 60ns
+3.3V
Image Data Transmission

Clock
0V
P103-17
GND
CCD PCB
P603-5
Ground
0V
P103-18
CCD-CK1
CCD PCB
P603-5
60ns 60ns
+3.3V
Image Data Transmission

Clock
0V
P103-19
AFE-SEN
CCD PCB
P603-5
Enable
Setting
+3.3V
0V
P103-20
ADCLK
CCD PCB
P603-5
30ns
+3.3V
A/D Sample Clock Input for

3-Channels Mode
0V
P103-21
GND
CCD PCB
P603-5
Ground
0V
P103-22
AFE-SCK
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Serial Interface Clock Input
0V
225
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P103-23
DB7
CCD PCB
P603-5
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-24
P103-25
MODE-SW
DB5
CCD PCB
P603-5
+5V
B/W
CCD PCB
P603-5
Color
Scan Mode Select Signal
0V
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-26
DB6
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-27
GND
CCD PCB
P603-5
Ground
0V
P103-28
DB4
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-29
DB3
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-30
DB2
CCD PCB
CN3-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-31
DB1
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P103-32
DB0
CCD PCB
P603-5
+3.3V
Data Signal
0V
P104
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P104-1
+24V
ADF PCB
PA04-1
Signal Waveform
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Function
226
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P104-2
ADF_PAPER- ADF PCB
S2--2
PA04-2
P104-3
+24V
P104-4
ADF_CLUCH- ADF PCB

2
PA04-4
VCC
P104-6
ADF_MOTER ADF PCB

_MODE-2
PA04-8
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
Document +5V
at Regist 1
0V
ADF PCB
PA04-3
P104-5
P104-7
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
+5V
Clutch ON
ADF PCB
PA04-7
Hight
Current
ADF Clutch Control Signal
0V
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
Low
Current
ADF Registration Sensor

Signal
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
ADF Motor Mode Control

Signal
0V
ADF PCB
PA04-9
Ground
0V
P104-8
ADFPH0-1
ADF PCB
PA04-10
1.2ms
2.0ms
P104-9
GND
+5V
0V
ADF PCB
PA04-1
Ground
0V
P104-10
ADFPH1-1
ADF PCB
PA04-1
+5V
0V
P104-11
ADF_PAPER- ADF PCB

S3--2
PA04-1
P104-12
ADFPH2-1
Document +5V
at Regist 2
0V
ADF PCB
PA04-1
+5V
ADF Sensor Signal
0V
P104-13
ADF_COVER- ADF PCB

2
PA04-1
ADF
Cover
Close
+3.3V
ADF Cover Open Detection

Signal
0V
227
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P104-14 ADFPH3-1
ADF PCB
PA04-1
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
0V
P104-15
ADF_PAPER- ADF PCB

S1-2
PA04-1
P104-16
ADF_ON_
LINE
P104-17
ADF_STAMP- ADF PCB

2
PA04-1
P104-18
+5VP
Doc.
Detected
+5V
ADF Paper Detection

Sensor Signal
0V
ADF PCB
PA04-1
ADF Detection Signal
+5V
Stamp ON
ADF PCB
PA04-1
0V
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Energy
Saver
P105
Signal
SPC PCB
Name
Pin No.
P105-1
OUT1
Destination
Signal Waveform
Scanner Motor-1
Function
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
P105-2
OUT2
Scanner Motor-2
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
P105-3
OUT3
Scanner Motor-3
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
P105-3
OUT4
Scanner Motor-4
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
P106
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P106-1
VCC
Home Detect
Sensor-1
Signal Waveform
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
Function
+5 VDC Power Supply
228
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
SPC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
P106-2
GND
Home Detect
Sensor-2
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
P106-3
GND
Home Detect
Sensor-3
Ground
0V
P106-4
HOME
Home Detect
Sensor-4
Scanner
at Home
Position
+5V
Home Position Detection

Signal
0V
229
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Engine Control PC Board
CN001
CN002
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN002-1
Signal Name
nADJUST
Destination
Signal Waveform
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-1
Function
+5V
LSU APC timing
0V
CN002-2
nVIDEO
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-2
+5V
Video Signal
0V
CN002-3
nLDON
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-3
+5V
LD Light Enable
0V
CN002-4
5VGND
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-4
Ground
0V
CN002-5
5V(LD)
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-5
CN002-6
5VGND
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-6
+5V
+5 VDC through Process

Interlock SW
Ground
0V
CN002-7
nHSYNC
LSU PCB
Laser Diode-7
+5V
Horizontal Sync Signal
0V
CN003
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN003-1
+5V
Process Interlock
SW-1
CN003-2
N.C.
Process Interlock
SW-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
Function
+5 VDC Power Supply
No Connection
230
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN003-3
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
+5V(LD)
Destination
Signal Waveform
Process Interlock
SW-3
Function
+5V
+5 VDC through Process

Interlock SW
CN004
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN004-1
Signal Name
24VGND
Destination
Signal Waveform
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-1
CN004-2
nMOEN_OP 2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-3
CLOCK_OP
Ground
0V
2nd Feeder +5V
Motor
Enable
0V
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-4
+24V
CN004-5
nPUCTL_OP 2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-6
nOPTION
+5V
+24V
2nd Feeder +5V

Pick up
Enable
0V
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
+5V
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-8
nPON_OP
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-9
5VGND
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
2nd Feeder Motor Control

Signal
CLOCK
0V
2nd Paper Feed

Module PCB
CN452-2
CN004-7
Function
2nd Feeder
Detection
+5V
2nd Feeder Paper Pick up

Control
2nd Feeder Option

Detection Signal
0V
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
2nd Feeder +5V
No Paper
Detection
0V
+5 VDC Power Supply
2nd Feeder No Paper

Detection Signal
Ground
0V
231
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN005
CN006
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN006-1
+24V
Front Cover
Safety Interlock
SW-3
CN006-2
24VGND
Front Cover
Safety Interlock
SW-5
CN006-3
Signal Name
+24VIR
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Ground
0V
Front Cover
Safety Interlock
SW-1
Cover Open +24V

Sleep &
Shutdown
+5V
+24 VDC through Front

Cover Safety Interlock SW
CN007
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN007-1
+5V
Thermistor-2
CN007-2
TH
Thermistor-1
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Fuser Thermistor Signal
0V
CN008
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN008-1
+24VIR
HVPS PCB
CN501-10
CN008-2
24VGND
HVPS PCB
CN501-9
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Cover Open +24V

Sleep &
Shutdown
+5V

Ground
0V
CN008-3
24VGND
Ground
HVPS PCB
CN501-8
0V
232
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN008-4
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
nCHGCTL
Destination
Signal Waveform
HVPS PCB
CN501-7
CN008-5
nDBCH
HVPS PCB
CN501-6
CN008-6
nDB
HVPS PCB
CN501-5
HVPS
Charge
Enable
Function
+5V
HVPS Charge Control (ON/

OFF)
0V
Developer +5V
Charge (+/-)
Enable
0V
+5V
Developer Charge (+/Change)
Developer (+ Voltage PWM

Pulse)
0V
CN008-7
CN008-8
nTRCTL
nTR
HVPS PCB
CN501-4
HVPS
Transfer
Enable
HVPS PCB
CN501-3
+5V
HVPS Transfer Control (+/Change)
0V
+5V
Transfer (- Voltage PWM

Pulse)
0V
CN008-9
+5V
CN008-10 5VGND
HVPS PCB
CN501-2
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
HVPS PCB
CN501-1
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN009
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN009-1
CN009-2
Signal Name
nTESEN
5VGND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Low Toner
Sensor
CN451-1
Low Toner
Detection
Low Toner
Sensor
CN451-2
Function
+5V
Low Toner Sensor Signal
0V
Ground
0V
233
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN010
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN010-1
Signal Name
nSNRCLK
Destination
Signal Waveform
LSU Motor-1
Function
+5V
LSU Motor Clock
0V
CN010-2
nSNRLD
LSU Motor-2
CN010-3
nSNRCTL
LSU Motor-3
CN010-4
24VGND
LSU Motor-4
LSU Motor +5V

Lock
Detection
0V
LSU Motor +5V
Control
Enable
0V
LSU Motor Lock Signal
LSU Motor Control Signal
Ground
0V
CN010-5
+24V
LSU Motor-5
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
CN011
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN011-1
CN011-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
PUSOL_CTL Pick Up
Solenoid-1
24VGND
Pick Up
Solenoid
ON
Function
+24V
0V
Ground
Pick Up
Solenoid-2
0V
CN012
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN012-1
Signal Name
REGSOL_C
TL
Destination
Signal Waveform
Registration
Solenoid
-1
+24V
Registration
Solenoid
0V
ON
Function
Registration Solenoid
Control
234
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN012-2
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Name
24VGND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Registration
Solenoid
-2
Function
Ground
0V
CN013
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN013-1
CN013-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
EXITSOL_C Exit Solenoid-1

TL
24VGND
Exit
Solenoid
ON
Function
+24V
Exit Solenoid Control
0V
Exit Solenoid-2
Ground
0V
CN014
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN014-1
+5V
CN014-2
5VGND
CN014-3
CN014-4
CN014-5
Signal Name
5VGND
nREGSEN
nTOPSEN
Destination
Signal Waveform
Registration/
Paper Detect
Sensor PC Board
CN401-1
Registration/
Paper Detect
Sensor PC Board
CN401-2
Function
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
Registration/
Paper Detect
Sensor PC Board
CN401-3
Ground
0V
Registration/
Paper Detect
Sensor PC Board
CN401-4
Registration
Sensor ON
Registration/
Paper Detect
Sensor PC Board
CN401-5
Paper
+5V
Detect
Sensor ON 0V
+5V
Registration Sensor Signal
0V
Paper Detect Sensor Signal
235
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN015
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN015-1
+5VSP
Paper Exit/ADU
Paper Jam
Sensor PC Board
CN402-1
CN015-2
5VGND
Paper Exit/ADU
Paper Jam
Sensor PC Board
CN402-2
CN015-3
CN015-4
Signal Name
5VGND
nEXITSEN
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
+5 VDC Energy Saver

Control
Ground
0V
Paper Exit/ADU
Paper Jam
Sensor PC Board
CN402-3
Ground
0V
Paper Exit/ADU
Paper Jam
Sensor PC Board
CN402-4
Exit
Sensor ON
+5V
EXIT Sensor Signal
0V
CN016
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN016-1
Signal Name
5VGND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
No Paper Sensor
CN450-1
Ground
0V
CN016-2
CN016-3
PNON
+5VSP
No Paper Sensor
CN450-2
+5V
No Paper Sensor Signal
No Paper
Sensor ON 0V
No Paper Sensor
CN450-3
+5V
+5 VDC Energy Saver

Control
CN017
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN017-1
Signal Name
+24VIR
Destination
Signal Waveform
Main Motor-1
Cover Open +24V

Sleep &
Shutdown
+5V
Function
236
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN017-2
+24VIR
Main Motor-2
CN017-3
24VGND
Main Motor-3
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Cover Open +24V

Sleep &
Shutdown
+5V

Ground
0V
CN017-4
24VGND
Main Motor-4
Ground
0V
CN017-5
nMMCTL
Main Motor-5
CN017-6
nMMLD
Main Motor-6
CN017-7
nMMHALF
Main Motor-7
Main Motor +5V

Control
Enable
0V
Main Motor +5V
Rotation
Enable
0V
+5V (H)
0V (L)
Main Motor Control Signal
Main Motor Rotation Signal
Motor Rotation Speed

Control
H: 1908.35 rpm
L: 954.18 rpm
CN018
Engine
Control
PCB
Pin No.
CN018-1
FANPER
Fan Motor-1
CN018-2
24VGND
Fan Motor-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
+24VDC Fan Power
Ground
0V
CN018-3
FANNERR
Fan Motor-3
+5V
Fan Error Detection Signal
0V
237
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL1 PC Board
CN220
CN230
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN230-1 LED0
PNL5 PCB
CN261-4
CN230-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
OPEN
LED Light
0V
PNL5 PCB
CN264-8
Ground
0V
CN230-3
LED1
PNL5 PCB
CN261-5
CN230-4
KIN6
PNL5 PCB
CN264-7
CN230-5
LED2
PNL5 PCB
CN261-6
CN230-6
SCN[0]
PNL5 PCB
CN264-1
CN230-7
LED3
PNL5 PCB
CN261-7
CN230-8
SCN[1]
PNL5 PCB
CN264-2
CN230-9
LED4
PNL5 PCB
CN261-8
CN230-10 KIN5
PNL5 PCB
CN264-6
CN230-11 LED5
OPEN
LED Light
0V
Key
Pressed
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
PNL5 PCB
CN261-9
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
Key
Pressed
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
Key
Scan
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
Key
Scan
+3.3V
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
238
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN230-12 KIN4
PNL5 PCB
CN264-5
CN230-13 LEDCT2
Signal Waveform
Key
Pressed
PNL5 PCB
CN261-1
CN230-15 LEDCT3
PNL5 PCB
CN264-4
CN230-17 LEDCT4
Key
Pressed
PNL5 PCB
CN261-2
0V
+3.3V
0V
+5V
LED ON
PNL5 PCB
CN264-3
Key
Scan
PNL5 PCB
CN261-3
+3.3V
0V
+5V
LED ON
0V
CN230-18 BAT+
LED ON
0V
CN230-16 SCN[2]
+3.3V
+5V
0V
CN230-14 KIN3
Function
PNL5 PCB
CN261-10
+3V
Lithium Battery
CN231
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN231-1 +SLP
PNL2 PCB
CN256-1
CN231-2
nLEDSLP
Signal Waveform
Function
+5VP
PNL2 PCB
CN256-2
+5VP
Energy Saver Lamp LED

Power Supply
Energy Saver Lamp LED

Control Signal
0V
CN231-3
nSLPKY
PNL2 PCB
CN256-3
+3.3V
PUSH
CN231-4
GND
0V
PNL2 PCB
CN256-4
Ground
0V
239
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN231-5 LEDCT0
PNL2 PCB
CN256-5
Signal Waveform
+5V
N.C.
PNL2 PCB
CN256-6
CN231-7
LEDCT1
PNL2 PCB
CN256-7
No Connection
+5V
CN231-9
nSCNDOR
LED6
CN231-10 SCN[2]
CN231-11 SCN[0]
CN231-12 SCN[1]
LED ON
0V
CN231-8
LED ON
0V
CN231-6
Function
PNL2 PCB
CN256-8
ADF
Closed
PNL2 PCB
CN256-9
+3.3V
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
PNL2 PCB
CN256-10
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN256-11
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN256-12
Key
Scan
ADF Open / Close

Detection Signal
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
CN232
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN232-1 SCN[4]
PNL3 PCB
CN262-1
CN232-2
CN232-3
SCN[5]
SCN[3]
Signal Waveform
Key
Scan
PNL3 PCB
CN262-2
Key
Scan
PNL3 PCB
CN262-3
Key
Scan
Function
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
240
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN232-4 SCN[6]
PNL3 PCB
CN262-4
CN232-5
KIN3
PNL3 PCB
CN262-5
CN232-6
N.C.
PNL3 PCB
CN262-6
CN232-7
KIN2
PNL3 PCB
CN262-7
CN232-8
CN232-9
KIN7
KIN1
CN232-10 KIN0
PNL3 PCB
CN262-8
PNL3 PCB
CN262-9
PNL3 PCB
CN262-10
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Key
Scan
Key
Pressed
Function
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
No Connection
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
CN233
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN233-1 +DAT
PNL2 PCB
CN252-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
DATA Lamp LED Power

Supply
0V
CN233-2
N.C.
PNL2 PCB
CN252-2
CN233-3
+ALM
PNL2 PCB
CN252-3
No Connection
+24V
ALARM Lamp LED Power

Supply
0V
CN233-4
SCN[5]
PNL2 PCB
CN252-4
Key
Scan
+3.3V
0V
241
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN233-5 +ACT
PNL2 PCB
CN252-5
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
ACTIVE Lamp LED Power

Supply
0V
CN233-6
CN233-7
SCN[6]
nLEDACT
PNL2 PCB
CN252-6
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN252-7
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
ACTIVE Lamp LED Control

Signal
0V
CN233-8
CN233-9
SCN[7]
nLEDALM
PNL2 PCB
CN252-8
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN252-9
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
ALARM Lamp LED Control

Signal
0V
CN233-10 LEDCT0
PNL2 PCB
CN252-10
0V
CN233-11 nLEDAT
+5V
+3.3V
DATA Lamp LED Control

Signal
LED ON
PNL2 PCB
CN252-11
0V
CN233-12 LED9
PNL2 PCB
CN252-12
CN233-13 LEDCT4
PNL2 PCB
CN252-13
OPEN
LED Light
0V
+5V
0V
CN233-14 LED8
PNL2 PCB
CN252-14
CN233-15 LEDCT3
PNL2 PCB
CN252-15
CN233-16 LED7
+5V
PNL2 PCB
CN252-16
LED ON
OPEN
LED Light
0V
0V
LED ON
OPEN
LED Light
0V
242
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN233-17 LEDCT2
PNL2 PCB
CN252-17
Signal Waveform
+5V
+5V
LED ON
0V
CN233-18 LEDCT1
Function
PNL2 PCB
CN252-18
LED ON
0V
CN234
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN234-1 KIN4
PNL2 PCB
CN255-1
CN234-2
CN234-3
CN234-4
CN234-5
CN234-6
CN234-7
CN234-8
CN234-9
KIN5
KIN3
KIN6
KIN2
KIN7
KIN1
SCN[11]
KIN0
PNL2 PCB
CN255-2
PNL2 PCB
CN255-3
PNL2 PCB
CN255-4
PNL2 PCB
CN255-5
PNL2 PCB
CN255-6
PNL2 PCB
CN255-7
Signal Waveform
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
PNL2 PCB
CN255-8
PNL2 PCB
CN255-9
Key
Scan
Key
Pressed
Function
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
243
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
PNL1 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN234-10 SCN[10]
PNL2 PCB
CN255-10
CN234-11 SCN[8]
CN234-12 SCN[9]
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN255-11
Key
Scan
PNL2 PCB
CN255-12
Key
Scan
Function
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
CN234-13 N.C.
PNL2 PCB
CN255-13
No Connection
CN234-14 GND
PNL2 PCB
CN255-14
Ground
0V
244
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
PNL2 PC Board
CN251
PNL2 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN251-1 LEDCT0
PNL3 PCB
CN263-1
Signal Waveform
+5V
LED8
PNL3 PCB
CN263-2
CN251-3
LED9
PNL3 PCB
CN263-3
CN251-4
KIN4
PNL3 PCB
CN263-4
CN251-5
KIN6
PNL3 PCB
CN263-5
LED ON
0V
CN251-2
Function
OPEN
LED Light
0V
OPEN
LED Light
0V
Key
Pressed
Key
Pressed
+3.3V
0V
+3.3V
0V
CN252
Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN233.
CN255
CN256
CN257
PNL2 PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN257-1 nBOOK
Scanner Door
Sensor
CN257-2
GND
Signal Waveform
ADF
Closed
Function
+3.3V
ADF Open / Close

Detection Signal
0V
Scanner Door
Sensor
Ground
0V
245
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.7.
PNL3 PC Board
6.4.8.
PNL5 PC Board
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN262
CN263
CN261
CN264
246
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.9.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
ADF PC Board
PA01
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA01-1
OUT1
ADF Motor-1
Signal Waveform
Function
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
PA01-2
OUT2
ADF Motor-2
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
PA01-3
OUT3
ADF Motor-3
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
PA01-4
OUT4
ADF Motor-4
+24V
Motor Drive Signal
0V
PA02
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA02-1
ADF
Paper Sensor-1
PAPER_S1
PA02-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Doc.
Detected
Function
+5V
Paper Sensor Signal
0V
Paper Sensor-2
Ground
0V
PA02-3
GND
Paper Sensor-3
Ground
0V
PA02-4
+5VP
Paper Sensor-4
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
Energy
Saver
PA03
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA03-1
ADF
Regist Sensor-1
PAPER_S2
Signal Waveform
Document
at regist 1
Function
+5V
Paper Register Sensor

Signal
0V
247
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA03-2
GND
Regist Sensor-2
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
PA03-3
GND
Regist Sensor-3
Ground
0V
PA03-4
VCC
Regist Sensor-4
+5V
Sleep &
Shutdown
0V
+5 VDC Power Supply
PA04
Refer to SPC PC Board P104.
PA05
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA05-1
ADF_
Cover Sensor-1
COVER
PA05-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Cover
Close
Function
+5V
ADF Cover Detection Signal
0V
Cover Sensor-2
Ground
0V
PA08
ADF PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
PA08-1
GND
STAMP Solenoid1
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
PA08-2
ADF_STAMP STAMP Solenoid2
+24V
Stamp ON
0V
248
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.10. FXB PC Board
CN110
CN113
FXB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN113-1 +5VP
MJR PCB
CN25-1
CN113-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
MJR PCB
CN25-2
+5 VDC Power Supply
Ground
0V
CN114
FXB PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN114-1 pSPKOT
Speaker
CN114-2
GND
Signal Waveform
Function
+1V
(Max)
-1V
(Min)
Speaker
Line Signal, Dial Tone
Ground
0V
249
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6.4.11.
Registration/Paper Detect Sensor PC Board
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CN401
Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN014.
6.4.12. Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC Board

CN402
6.4.13. No Paper Sensor PC Board
CN450
6.4.14. Low Toner Sensor PC Board

CN451
250
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.15. 2nd Paper Feed Module I/F PC Board

CN452
CN453
I/F PCB
Pin No.
CN453-1
Signal Name
5VGND
Destination
Signal Waveform
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
CN453-2
nMOEN_OP 2nd Feeder

PC Board
CN602-1
CN453-3
nPON_OP
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
CN453-4
nOPTION
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
CN453-5
nPUCTL_OP 2nd Feeder

PC Board
CN602-1
CN453-6
24VGND
Function
Ground
0V
2nd Feeder +5V
Motor
Enable
0V
2nd Feeder +5V
No Paper
Detection
0V
2nd Feeder
Detection
+5V
2nd Feeder No Paper

Detection Signal
2nd Feeder Option

Detection Signal
0V
2nd Feeder +5V

Pick up
Enable
0V
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1

Signal
2nd Feeder Paper Pick up

Control
Ground
0V
CN453-7
+5V
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN453-8
+24V
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
+24V
CN453-9
CLOCK_OP
2nd Feeder
PC Board
CN602-1
+5V
CLOCK
0V
251
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.16. HVPS
CN501
6.4.17. LVPS
CN101
CN102
LVPS
Pin No.
CN102-1
Signal Name
GND
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
DC PCB
CN141-3
Ground
0V
CN102-3
+24V
DC PCB
CN141-1
+24V
CN2
LVPS
Pin No.
CN2-1
Signal Name
ACL
Destination
Signal Waveform
LVPS
CN2-1
Function
AC Power Supply (Live)
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
CN2-3
ACN
LVPS
CN2-3
AC Power Supply (Neutral)
AC120V
(AC200-240V)
252
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.18. DC PC Board
CN141
Refer to LVPS CN102.
CN143
DC PCB
Signal Name
Destination
Pin No.
CN143-12 GND
HDD I/F
Signal Waveform
Function
Ground
0V
CN143-13 +5VP
HDD I/F
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN143-14 +5VP
HDD I/F
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN143-15 +5VP
HDD I/F
+5V
+5 VDC Power Supply
253
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
6.4.19. 2nd Feeder PC Board

CN600
2nd
Feeder
PCB
Pin No.
CN600-1
+24V
2nd Feeder
Motor-1
CN600-2
+24V
2nd Feeder
Motor-2
CN600-3
2nd Feeder
Motor-3

Signal
CN600-4
NA
2nd Feeder
Motor-4

Signal
CN600-5
2nd Feeder
Motor-5

Signal
CN600-6
NB
2nd Feeder
Motor-6

Signal
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
Function
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
Sleep & +24V
Shutdown
0V
CN601
2nd
Feeder
PCB
Pin No.
CN601-1
CN601-2
Signal Name
Destination
Signal Waveform
PUSOL_CTL Pick Up
1
Solenoid-1
+24V
Pick Up
Solenoid
ON
Pick Up
Solenoid-2
Function
+24V
0V
Sleep & +24V

Shutdown
0V
CN602
Refer to 2nd Feed Module I/F PC Board CN453.
254
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
7 Installation
7.1.
Set Up Precautions
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.
Ambient conditions Temperature: 50 - 86 F (10 - 30 C)
Relative humidity: 30 - 80 %
Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
Exposed to direct sunlight
Dusty environment
Poorly ventilated location
Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
Exposed to strong vibration
Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:
UF-9000, DP-180/190: Approx. 48.5 lb (22 kg)
3. The maximum power consumption is 900 W for 120 VAC, or 1.0 kW for 220-240 VAC. Depending on
the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must
also be protected for at least 15 Amps for 120 VAC, or 10 Amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt
about a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other
devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)
5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.
6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation
it requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
255
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Space Requirements
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
19.92 in (506 mm)
42.36 in (1076 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
14.57 in (370 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
26.06 in (662 mm)
4.33 in (110 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm)
19.92 in (506 mm)
42.36 in (1076 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
Main Unit + Handset Option
14.57 in (370 mm)
3.94 in (100 mm)
30.39 in (772 mm)
256
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
7.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Unpacking
Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before
installation.
Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 48.5 lb (22 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Main Unit
Rear Paper Tray Cover
Drum Unit
Toner Cartridge
Hole Cover
AC Power Cord
Telephone Line Cable
Quick Guide
Operating Instructions CD
Panasonic-DMS CD
License Agreement
Directory Holder
Warranty Information Sheet
Installation Instructions
Remarks
For UF-9000
For DP-180/190
Includes Operating Instructions
This document
1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.

2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
257
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
7.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Installation Procedure
Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.
2. The following machine illustrations, depict a UF-9000 with the USA standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Bracket to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. Please make sure to read the Important Note! at the end of these Installation Instructions.
7.3.1.
Installation Procedure
<Remove the Shipping Materials>
(1) Remove the Shipping Rubber Cushion.
(2) Turn the Shipping Bracket in either direction of

the arrow to unlock and remove the bracket.
(To facilitate removal, open the ADF and observe
the position of the bracket through the Platen
Glass)
Caution:
Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before
unlocking the scanner.
Note:
Store the Shipping Materials (Rubber Cushion and
Shipping Bracket) in a safe place for future use.
258
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove the Protection Strip from the Battery.
<Installing the Toner Cartridge>

<For USA/Canada/UK/Germany/France, and other

Destinations> Skip to Step (6)
The Toner Label is attached in the Factory.
<For Euro Special Destinations only,
DP-180-AMR/EHR/EPR/YAR/YCR>
(5) Attach the Toner Label in the preferred
language to the inside of the Cover as illustrated.
(6) Carefully remove the Protective Sheet from the

Drum Unit.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light.
Even if it is a fluorescent lamp, approx.1000 lm/m2
(1000 lx).
259
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(7) Shake the Toner Cartridge 10 to 15 times to

loosen the contents.
(8) Remove the Protective Cover.
(9) Insert the side pins of the Toner Cartridge into

the slots of the Drum Unit.
(10) Push down the Toner Cartridge to lock in place
as illustrated.
(11) Install the Toner Cartridge into the machine.
(12) Push down to lock in place as illustrated.

(13) Close the Front Cover.
260
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(14) Remove the Caution Label covering the AC

Inlet on the machine.
(15) Plug the AC Power Cord.
(16) Connect one end of the Line Cable (Telephone)
to the LINE Jack on the back side of the
machine, and the other end to the Telephone
Jack on the wall.
(17) If required, connect the LAN / USB Cable
(not included).
(18) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the ON position and confirm that the
Scanner is unlocked and moves freely.
Note:
Perform the following adjustments after the
machine has warmed up and displays:
<For USA / Canada etc> Skip to Step (23)
READY TO COPY
COPIES:001
<For Europe and Other Destinations only>
DP-180 (**)
***
DESTINATION CODE :
PRESS \/ /\ TO SELECT
Note:
The (**) *** in the LCD display above may differ
depending on the destination.
(19) Press V or /\ arrow keys to select the desired
destination.
(20) Press the "SET" key.
(21) Press the "1" key for YES.
After the machine has warmed up, it displays:
READY TO COPY
COPIES:001
(22) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the
machine to the OFF position, and back to the ON
position.
261
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(23) Install the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
<Installing the Hole Cover>

machine to the OFF position.
(25) Open the ADF and observe the position of the
Hole Cover through the Platen Glass, to facilitate
installation.
(26) Install the Hole Cover.
(27) Turn the Hole Cover counterclockwise by
pushing from the bottom and ensure that it is
positioned as illustrated.
Note:
If the Hole Cover position is incorrectly positioned,
the scanner will not work properly.
machine to the ON position, and reconfirm that
the Scanner still moves freely.
(29) Load paper into the Paper Tray.

Caution:
Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs and
that it does not exceed the Max. Level Indicator.
You can load up to 250 sheets (20 lb / 75 g/m2).
(30) Make a copy on the Platen to ensure the
machine works properly.
262
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
7.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)

UF-9000
DP-180/190
that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below.
7.4.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available

7.4.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List

feature.
Important Note!
The Default setting of Fax Parameter No. 177 XMT FILE TYPE for this machine is 2: PDF, as PDF
has become the industry standard for exchanging documents from computer to computer (Scan-to-Email
feature).
However, this PDF format cannot be used for Internet Faxing (i.e. from an Internet Fax machine to an
Internet Fax machine) as current Internet Fax Specifications do not support PDF file format. Internet
Faxing requires TIFF-F file format. If your customers requirements are mainly Internet Faxing, please
change the Fax Parameter No. 177 XMT FILE TYPE to 1: TIFF/JPEG.
If your customer uses both Internet Fax and Scan-to-Email and needs to switch file formats on the fly,
please explain to them how to use the Select Mode (F8-6) XMT FILE TYPE/NAME for individual
transmissions. After the transmission is completed, the machine returns to its Default setting.
Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax/Email) included on the CD for
DP-180/190 and on the printed copy for UF-9000.
263
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
8 Options and Supplies

8.1.
Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation
To use PCL (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190) or PS (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188:

DP-180/190) option individually, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required
firmware is on the CD included with the options.
Note:
The 8 MB Expansion Board (DA-EM600) must be installed for the printer controllers above to function.
The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the PostScript (PS) or PCL option. There will
never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added.
Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read, and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.
The firmware for SC, and SPC must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with
the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.
Firmware Version Table (Select according to machine's production date)
Important Notice
The Firmware in the tables below are not interchangeable.
Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above, cannot be used on machines with
Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations).
New Navy Blue Color
Light Blue Color
For all DP-180/190, and UF-9000 starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above (Navy Blue
Control Panel) use the following firmware:
< Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe >
SC
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
Standard Firmware
User Auth. (SC = Type A)
PCL Firmware
User Auth. (SC = Type B)
PostScript Firmware
User Auth. (SC = Type D)
DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
Required
264
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
For all previous DP-180/190, and UF-9000 with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below (Light Blue
Control Panel) use the following firmware:
< Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe >
Standard Firmware
(SC = Type A)
SC
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
PCL Firmware
(SC = Type B)
PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type D)
DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
Required
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions
8.1.1.
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:

Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the
Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
265
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for
\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx

User
Authentication
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transferring Order
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically
by selecting the Firmware Type.
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section
"Updating through the USB Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
location.
266
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.1.2.
Updating through the USB Port (Alternate Method)
UF-9000
DP180/190
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.
Setup:
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:

Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.
267
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for

\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx
Firmware File
DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin
DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin
Transferring
Order
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-1
1-2
1-3
2
DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin
DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin
DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin
DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-1
1-2
1-3
2
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-1
1-2
1-3
2
DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin
DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-1
1-2
1-3
2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window
appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting
the Firmware Type.
Note:
2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
location.
268
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
8.1.3.
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method)
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).
Power Cord.)
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys, and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby.
10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are
other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby mode.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency
Recovery)
8.1.3.1.
Creating a Master Firmware Card

A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit
Setup:
Example:
From:
Firmware Code File:
To:
269
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
Power Cord.)
2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port.
Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC.
(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
Power Cord.)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
8.1.3.2.
Erasing the Master Firmware Card

Power Cord.)
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET
TO START. Press STOP.
7. Press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
270
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.1.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only)

UF-9000
DP180/190
that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then
you cannot add this feature.
8.1.4.1.
Checking whether the User Authentication is available
8.1.4.2.
Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List


feature.
271
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.2.
8.2.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6

(DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190)
Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Remarks
Hardware Key
Software CD
PCL KEY
This document
License Agreement
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
8.2.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the
Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then
unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to
prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the
AC Power Cord.)
(2) Remove 5 Silver Screws.

(3) Remove the Right Cover.
272
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness.

(6) Remove 7 Screws.

(7) Remove the SC Cover.
(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324

connector on the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the
SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.
(9) Proceed with the installation of other options.
If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.
(10) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON
position.
(11) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was
disconnected.
(12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service
Notes".
(13) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.
273
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.3.
8.3.1.
Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6

(DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Remarks
Hardware Key
Software CD
Adobe PostScript 3 Label
PS KEY
For Adobe PostScript Driver
This document
License Agreement
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
8.3.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the
Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)

274
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324

connector on the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the
SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.

position.
disconnected.
(12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service
Notes".
(13) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with
the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
(14) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front
Cover as illustrated.
275
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.4.
Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD19)
8.4.1.
Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
8.4.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Description
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
DC PCB
HDD Bracket
HDD Harness
DC Harness
Edge Saddle
Harness Clamp (Small)
Harness Clamp (Medium)
Part No.
See Note
DZEC103051
DZJC000389
DZFP001565
DZFP001566
DZJK000057
DZJK000004
DZJK000067
Screw (Short)
XTB3+4F
Screw (Medium)
XTW3+6LFC
1
1
Firmware CD
DZHP010773
See Note
Remarks
Flat Cable
Power Supply Cable
Black-Square
Black
White
For USA version only (UF-9000)

This document
Installation
1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is
installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB
(DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required.
Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).
2. For UF-9000, V2.xxxxx or higher SC firmware is required. Update the Firmware referring to the
Service Notes Firmware Update.
3. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)
276
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190




(9) Remove the Left Cover.
277
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190

(11) Remove the Rear Cover.
(12) Connect the HDD Harness to the HDD.
Correct
PCB
Side
HDD
Incorrect
PCB
Side
Note:
Make sure that the HDD Harness is connected to
the HDD correctly as illustrated.
HDD
(13) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket as

illustrated.
(14) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Short Screws
(XTB3+4F).
278
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
(15) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Small).

(16) Install the DC PC Board.
(17) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Medium Screws
(XTW3+6LFC).
(18) Install the HDD Assembly.

(19) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Short Screws
(XTB3+4F).
(20) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Medium).

(21) Connect one end of the HDD Harness to CN143
on the DC PC Board.
(22) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness
Clamps.
(23) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium).

(24) Connect other end of the HDD Harness to
CN309 on the SC PC Board.
(25) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness
Clamp.
279
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(26) Reinstall the SC Cover.

(27) Secure the SC Cover with 7 Screws.
Note:
Tuck the Ferrite Core into the SC Cover as
illustrated.
(28) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Small), and Edge

Saddle.
(29) Connect the DC Harness to CN141 connector

on the DC PC Board, and route the Harness
through a hole on the side of the machine.
(30) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness
Clamps.
(31) Connect the DC Harness to the LVPS.
280
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
(32) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness

Clamps.
(33) Reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers.
position.
disconnected.
(36) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service
Notes of this manual.
281
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
CAUTION!
<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>

After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed
(similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch
on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER
(Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below.
2. Press "FUNCTION" and, "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first.
3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit, and advances into ENERGY SAVER MODE.
5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect
the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)
6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down
procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed
(indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries
related to abrupt Power Off.
7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>
An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD19) is
installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration
from 200 to 1,000 Stations, and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the
HDD automatically.
Note:
1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book
information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or
RDS as backup.
2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the
200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will
be preserved).
3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling
the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address
book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power
Switch) procedure was not followed.
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied, and transferred (using copy, and
paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
The size, and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the PDMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the UF-9000/DP-180/190.
1) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
2) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of
Fax Address Book is activated on the UF-9000/DP-180/190.
b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
282
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network

MFP Utilities.
2) Click on Network Device Locator.
3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.
4) In the menu bar, click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
5) The Network Address Book Editor "UF-9000/DP-180/190" window appears, under the Address
Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on
File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
7) Then click the OK button.
c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "UF-9000/DP-180/190
(Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b), and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data,
and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again.
(Refer to Help.)
f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer, and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
283
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.5.
8.5.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)

Contents
Qty.
1
2
1
Description
Expansion F-ROM Board
PC Board Support
Part No.
DZEC102137
DZJH000084
DZSM000756
Remarks
This document
Note:
8.5.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)


284
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190

(8) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1

(CN327) [Lower], if it was preinstalled.
(9) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1
(Lower) on the SC PC Board.
(10) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot
1 (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board, and
secure with the Supporters.
Note:
The Program Extension F-ROM Board must
always be installed into Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower] for
the PCL or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.
position.
disconnected.
285
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.6.
8.6.1.
Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16 / 64 / 128 MB

(DA-SM16B / 64B / 28B)
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Contents
Qty.
Description
Image Memory
Part No.
DZEC102306
DZEC101919
DZEC102307
DZSM000757
Remarks
16 MB
64 MB
128 MB
This document
Note:
8.6.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)

286
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on

the SC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the
SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30 angle into the
memory socket, and then lock it down.
position.
disconnected.
287
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.7.
8.7.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)

Contents
Qty.
1
Description
Part No.
UE-410047
UE-410048
Image Memory
Remarks
4 MB
8 MB
Note:
8.7.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)
(1) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
(2) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory

Card as illustrated.
Caution:
Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage
to the card or machine.
(3) Reinstall the Cover.
position.
disconnected.
288
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.8.
8.8.1.
UF-9000
DP180/190
Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module (DA-DS188)

Unpacking
Visually check the condition, and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage
before installation.
Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment.
Qty.
1
1
1
2
2
Description
Bracket R
Bracket L
Bracket
Leg Cushion
Part No.
----PJULC0022Z
PJULC0023Z
See Note
PJHRB0701Z
Silver Screw
See Note
Screw
See Note
PJQMB0132Z
Remarks
This document
Note:
8.8.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)
(2) Place the machine on top of the 2nd Paper Feed

Module aligning with the 2 Guides.
289
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Remove the 2nd Paper Tray.
(4) Install the 2 Brackets from the rear side of the

machine as illustrated.
(5) Secure the 2 Brackets with 2 Screws.

(7) Remove the 2 Rear Legs.
290
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190

(9) Install the Bracket L, and Bracket R as
illustrated.
(10) Secure the 2 Brackets with 8 Silver Screws.
(11) Install the Leg Cushions underneath the Rear

Legs.
(12) Install the 2 Rear Legs to 2nd Paper Feed

Module.
(13) Secure the 2 Rear Legs with 6 Screws.
(14) Connect the Harness of the 2nd Paper Feed

Module to the machine.
Note:
Make sure the Connector is inserted securely as
illustrated.
(15) Reinstall the 2nd Paper Tray.
(16) Reinstall the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
position.
disconnected.
291
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(19) Load paper into the 2nd Paper Tray.

Caution:
Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs,
and that it does not exceed the Max. Level
Indicator. You can load up to 550 sheets (20 lb / 75
g/m2).
292
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
8.9.
8.9.1.
UF-9000
DP180/190
Installing the Handset Kit (UE-403171/UE-403172)

Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
Description
Cradle Assembly
Handset
Handset Cord
Part No.
See Note
See Note
DZFN000060
DZSM000254
Remarks
This document
Note:
8.9.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)
(1) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly
into the holes on the Left Cover.
(2) Connect the Handset Cord to the Cradle
Assembly, and the Handset as illustrated.
(3) Fasten the Cradle Assembly Cable onto the

Hooks on the Rear Cover as illustrated.
(4) Remove the Protective Tab covering the

HANDSET Jack on the Rear Cover.
(5) Connect the Cradle Assembly Cord.
position.
disconnected.
293
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
8.10. Installing the Mechanical Counter Kit (DZTQ000066)
(Supplied as a Service Part)
8.10.1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
3
1
1
Description
Mechanical Counter
MC Harness
Counter Bracket
Harness Clamp
Screw
Part No.
DZTK000002
DZFP001567
DZJC000390
DZJK000004
XTW3+6L
DZSM000801
Remarks
This document
Note:
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION!
AC Power Cord.)

294
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP180/190


(8) Install the Mechanical Counter to the MC

Bracket.
(9) Connect the MC Harness to the Mechanical

Counter.
295
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(10) Install 3 Harness Clamps.
(11) Install the Mechanical Counter.

(12) Secure the Mechanical Counter with 1 Screw.
(13) Secure the MC Harness with 3 Harness Clamps.
(14) Connect the MC Harness to CN302 on the SC
PC Board.
(15) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover.

position.
disconnected.
296
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9 General Network Information

9.1.
9.1.1.
Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer
Name
Function
Application
Presentation
Session
Protocol
SMB
SMTP
FTP
DNS
HTTP
Telnet
etc...
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...
TDI
Transport
Network
TCP, UDP
IP, IPX, etc...
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
Datalink
Physical
Router
PPP...
NIC
SW Hub
Repeater
Hub
Ethernet
Token Ring
FDDI
ATM
etc...
RS-232C, X21...
MAC Address
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
297
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.1.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer
7
6
5
OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base

Function
This layer embraces functions of the OSI
Application
Application
Session, Presentation and Application
Presentation
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
Session
network services.
Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Transport
Transport
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
Network
Internet
Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Network
Data Link
the OSI model. This correspondence
Interface
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
Physical
standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
9.1.3.
Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 .
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category
1
2
3
4
5
Purpose
Voice grade telephone line
ISDN
10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
Token Ring (16M)
100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
298
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.2.
9.2.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Layer Functions and Technology

MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturers code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner.
For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from
each station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
PCC : 080023
9.2.2.
Network Control
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) is a network control protocol. If a node
is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the
data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to
control the connection.
The General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,
Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format
Least significant bit

Most significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data
FCS
6 byte
8 byte
2 byte
6 byte
46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node,
it must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit.
When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
299
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.
Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte
1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format

SFD
Access Frame
1 byte Control control
1 byte 1 byte
Destination Source
Data
MAC
MAC
6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte

ED
FCS
Frame
4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)

Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
300
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.2.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
10Base-5
Speed (bps) Topology

Cable Type
10M
Bus
Yellow cable
10Base-T
10M
100Base-TX 100M
Star
Star
Max Length
500 m (1640 ft)
Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)

Twisted Pair (Cat. 5)
200 m (656 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m)

10
BASE
Logical speed
(Mbps)
BASE : baseband (digital)

BROAD: broadband (analog)
10
BASE
T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable

no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration
301
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
1
2
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
Straight Cable
Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1"
"0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent.
The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for
collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the
end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.
9.2.4.
Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5.
NIC (Network Interface Card)
NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
302
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.3.
9.3.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Network Layer
IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address
Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
303
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.3.2.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Network
Address
192.168.32.0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192
168
32
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255
255
255
0
IP
Subnet Mask
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
190.0.3.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.3
255.255.255.0
Router
190.0.2.1
255.255.255.0
Note
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
190.0.1.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.3
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.3
255.255.255.0
Third
Floor
Second
Floor
Ground
Floor
Class B Subnet Outline

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all 0
2. Host address is set to all 1
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all 1
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all 0
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with 127
Reserved for loop back address
304
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.3.3.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:
1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version
Internet
Header Length
Type Of Service
Total Length
ID
Time To Live
Flags
Fragment Offset
Header Checksum
Protocol
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms
Version
Internet Header
Length
Type Of Service
ID
Flags
Fragment Offset
Time To Live
Protocol
Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option
Padding
Detail
Currently version 4
IP Header field length
Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Packet disassembly information
Offset from most significant bit
Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Senders IP Address
Destinations IP Address
When implemented
Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
305
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.3.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

192.168.32/24
PC-A
192.168.32.1/24
192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-C
192.168.33.1/24
PC-B
192.168.32.2/24
OK
PC-D
192.168.33.2/24
OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
306
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.4.
9.4.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.
IP Datagram
TCP segment
TCP Header
(20 byte)
IP Header
(20 byte)
Application Data
(vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte)
Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length
(4 bit)
Reserved
(6 bit)
Control Flag
(6 bit)
Checksum (2 byte)
Option
Window (6 byte)
Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
307
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Client
SYN, Se
quential
No.=453
8970
Increments No. sequentially
8971
No.=453
K
C
000
A
,
K
AC
1919424
.=
o
N
l
a
quenti
SYN, Se
ACK, AC
K
No.=191
9724001
Server
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
308
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.5.
9.5.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
DNS Server (root)

DNS Server (jp)
3
2
1
Panasonic
Device
5
4
6
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com)
DNS Server (co.jp)
DNS Server Mail Server

mlsv.panafax.co.jp
(panafax.co.jp)
domain
DNS Name Resolution Sample

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
309
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. The Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2.
Primary Name Server
9.5.3.
Secondary Name Server
A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone,
it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
310
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.5.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:
;
; File:
db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
;
SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
;
default parameters for information this DNS is
;
authorized for:
;
@
IN SOA
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213
; serial number
43200
; refresh every 12 hours
; retry after 2 hours
7200
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1
IN PTR
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
311
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.5.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machines name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy

; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg
IN
SOA
nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN
NS
nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN
MX
10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03
IN
A
172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1
IN
A
133.185.254.212
ifaxos01
IN
A
172.21.97.26
ifpdyna
IN
A
202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
9.5.6.
PTR (Pointer) Record
Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
1
;
IN NS
IN PTR
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

9.5.7.
CNAME (Canonical Name) Record
The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
312
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.5.8.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9.
MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
9.5.10. Reverse Lookup
This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11.
Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
313
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.6.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc.org/rfc821
SMTP Server
PC
Internet
PC
POP Server
DNS Server
SMTP
POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
9.6.1.
Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157
for <freeport@labo.pcc.com>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.pcc.com>
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <ifax98-us@labo.pcc.com>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: freeport@labo.pcc.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
Delivery route
Message ID
Content-Type
314
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.7.
9.7.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
ITU T.37 and RFC2305

Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.
Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2.
Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file

Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Include Message-ID
Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications
Receiver
Required
Optional
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place

MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Use other TIFF Profiles
315
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
9.7.3.
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
Definitions and Abbreviations

IETF
RFC
MIME
POP3
SMTP
DSN
MDN
TIFF
IFD
Offramp
gateway
Mailstore
Notice
Internet Engineering Task Force

Request For Comment
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
Post Office Protocol version 3
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Delivery Status Notification
Message Disposition Notification
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF Image File Directory
Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/
G4 facsimile terminals
Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device
RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/
File Format for Internet Fax

Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Subtype Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile
RFC2301
RFC2302
RFC2303
RFC2304
RFC2305
RFC2306
316
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.7.4.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
Color
B/W
J
(JBIG)
C (JPEG)
F
(MMR, MR)
L (JPEG)
M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
S
F
J
C
L
Class
Color
B/W
B/W
B/W
Color
Color
Color
Coding Method
MH
MMR, MR
JBIG
JPEG (lossy)
JPEG (lossless,
grayscale)
Mixed Raster
Content
Remarks
Internet Fax minimal set
Internet Fax full mode
Internet Fax mixed mode
Color minimal set
One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous
tone color and grayscale images
Multiple coders and resolution within a page
317
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.7.5.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields
Bits Per Sample
Compression
Fill Order
Image Width
Image Length
New Sub File Type
Page Number
Photometric Interpretation
Resolution Unit
Rows Per Strip
Samples Per Pixel
Strip Byte Counts
Strip Offsets
X Resolution
Y Resolution
Extensions Fields
T4 Options
9.7.6.
Values
1
3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Least significant bit first
1728 (A-4)
N: total number of scan lines in image
2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
0: pixel value 1 means black
2: inch
Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
1
Number of byte in TIFF strip
Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
204, 200 (pixels/inch)
98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp
FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com

Global-phone
Service selector
Domain
(2) Sub address
FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
(3) Others
VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com

Global-phone
Service selector
Domain
Domain
318
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD NOT,
RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms REQUIRED or SHALL, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase SHALL NOT, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective RECOMMENDED, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7.
Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Header
Value Offset
Value Offset
IFD (Page 0)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 0)
IFD (Page 1)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 1)
First IFD Offset

Next IFD Offset
Strip Offset
Next IFD Offset

Strip Offset
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
319
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Message Header Contents
9.7.8.
Delivery Failure
9.7.9.
Image File Format
In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
320
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.8.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

SMTP Server
(sv2.labo.pcc.com)
your Panasonic Device

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening Session
[5 minutes]
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready
SMTP Command
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
DATA
[2 minutes]
250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK 1
[3 minutes]
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
[10 minutes]
Closing
DATA BLOCK 2
250 OK
QUIT
221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing
transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
321
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.8.1.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>
QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, Hello, I am <domain>.
9.8.2.
Mail (MAIL)
9.8.3.
RECIPIENT (RCPT)
9.8.4.
Data (DATA)
9.8.5.
Send
9.8.6.
Reset (RSET)
9.8.7.
Verify (VRFY)
9.8.8.
Quit (QUIT)
9.8.9.
Reply Codes from SMTP Server
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.
This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence <CRLF>.<CRLF>. This is the end of mail data indication.
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
322
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.8.10.
211
220
221
250
251
354
421
450
451
452
500
501
502
503
504
550
551
552
553
554
NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES
UF-9000
DP-180/190
System status or system help reply

<domain> Service ready
<domain> Service closing transmission channel
Requested mail action okay# completed
User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
<domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
Requested action aborted: local error in processing
Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
Command not implemented
Bad sequence of commands
Command parameter not implemented
Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
User not local; please try <forward-path>
Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
Transaction failed
323
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.9.
POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)
9.9.1.
Introduction
9.9.2.
Basic Operation
UF-9000
DP-180/190
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the clients mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by
responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
324
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3.
POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name
PASS string
QUIT
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
STAT
LIST [msg]
RETR [msg]
DELE [msg]
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
valid in the TRANSACTION state
Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest
valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP [msg]
UIDL [msg]
valid in the TRANSACTION state
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From:
To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
325
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

(ef1.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session
AUTHORIZATION
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session
POP 3 Server
(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

+OK POP Server ready
<1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

+OK POP Server ready
<1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
TRANSACTION
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
326
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command
Sample
Ping
Ping 192.168.1.30
Ipconfig /all
Tracert
Netstat
Net view
Nslookup
Purpose
Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all
Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type winipcfg instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat
Active connection list
Netstat -nr
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view
Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup
Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
327
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
Is the LAN connected

to an ISP
Yes
No
No
DHCP Client?
Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No
Is static IP address
available ?
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Is G3 Gateway
function being used ?
Yes
Is there a MX and A Record

entry for your Panasonic
Device in the DNS table ? No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Not supported
Is POP account
available ?
Is POP account
available ?
No
No
Is there a MX and A Record

entry for your Panasonic
Device in the DNS table ?
No
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters
for POP receiving
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup
a new POP account.
Set network parameters

for SMTP receiving
If not ready
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Set network parameters for

POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup a
new POP account.
Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Important Notice:
Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask
the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing
the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.
Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.
328
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.
In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message
Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER
Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK
Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK
Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE
Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE
Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM
Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
329
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Client
Server
(not selected)
Server
(selected)
Begins initialization
Determines
configuration
DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPDISCOVER
Determines
configuration
DHCPOFFER
DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
Discards lease
DHCPRELEASE
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server
Client
Server
Begins initialization
Locates
configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPACK
DHCPACK
Locates
configuration
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
330
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT
DHCPNAK/
Restart
-/Send DHCPREQUES
DHCPACK
(not accepted)/
Send DHCPDECLINE
-/Send DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer
SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
Collect replies
REBOOTING
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING
REBINDING
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
DHCPNAK/
Halt network
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
T1 expires/
Send
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
RENEWING
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the clients network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the clients lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
331
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature
UF-9000
DP-180/190
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)
(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Your Panasonic device supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)
A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
DSN
N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
332
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
UF-9000
DP-180/190
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX
(3)
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
(2)
Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.
333
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <fax@core.mega.edu>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@huge.com
Disposition-Notification-To: <fax@core.mega.edu>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
MESSAGE
HEADER
BODY
TEXT
Mime-Version: 1.0
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: <fax@huge.com>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
**********
Read Receipt
**********
This message was opened by

fax@huge.com
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************
ATTACHED
FILE
Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com
Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
334
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
(3) Processing Confirmation

The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
335
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement
the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they
can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:
<process-ID.clock@hostname>
where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.
336
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD
Produces a 16 octet digest value of

c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
+OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>

APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)
Possible Responses:
+OK
-ERR permission denied
STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
337
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)

- Extended Feature
UF-9000
DP-180/190
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
BASE64 decoded string
Produces a Challenge
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft>
Genrates Digest parameter
Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER
Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
Fred
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
338
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
339
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature
Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as
SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.
Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an
SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask
the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured
as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the
DNS Server.
For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled
in the General Settings (For Key Operator).
Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's
Intranet.
Several new service extensions were assigned.
(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender
Recipient
Establish TCP connection
220
EHLO
250 Response of CONNEG
MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com>
250
Request for Capability
RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG

250 Capacity Exchange
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview
TCP Port No. 25
Checks for Capability

Capability contents sample
250-<june@panasonic.com> recipient ok
250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
250- (&(dpi=200)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
250 (ua-media=stationery) )
340
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
memo
341
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
220-240 VAC
+24V
24VGND
1
2
3
4
5
nSNRCTL
nSNRLD
nSNRCLK
1
2
3
4
5
nHSYNC
5VGND
nPON_OP
+5V
nOPTION
nPUCTL_OP
+24V
nMOEN_OP
CLOCK_OP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24VGND
nTECTL
+5V
nTR
nTRCTL
nDB
nCHGCTL
nDBCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
24VGND
24VGND
+24VIR
+24VIR
+24V
24VGND
1
2
3
1
2
3
+5V(LD)
N.C.
+5V
NTOP
ZCIN
NSBSY
GND
NVIDEO
GND
NHSYNC
NRES
NPURGE
GND
CXD
GND
CCLK
GND
SXD
GND
NPRINT
NCBSY
N.C.
N.C.
NPRDY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
N.C.
ZCIN
PSAVE
+24V
+24V
24VGND
CN004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2nd Paper Feed
Module I/F
GND
HOME
KIN6
GND
1
2
PA04
ADF
PA02
GND
ADF_COVER
1
2
3
ADF_CLUTCH-2
4
VCC(+5VDC)
5
ADF_MOTOR_MODE-2
6
GND
7
ADFPH0-1
8
GND
9
ADFPH1-1
10
ADF_PAPER-S3-2
11
ADFPH2-1
12
ADF_COVER-2
13
ADFPH3-1
14
ADF_PAPER-S1-2
15
ADF_ON_LINE
16
ADF_STAMP-2
17
+5VP
18
ADF_PAPER-S2-2
P103
STAMP
Solenoid
PA08
OUT4
1
2
3
4
PA01
OUT3
PA05
OUT2
1
2
3
4
OUT1
+24V
+24V
P104
1
GND
2
GND
3
VCC(+5VDC)
4
ADF_PAPER_S2
PNL3
(10 Keys)
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
GND
P601
1
2
+24V
3
+24V
4
+12V
5
+12V
6
VCC(+5VDC)
7
INV-SW-1
8
CDSCLK2
9
CCD-TG
10
GND
11
CCD-RS
12
CCDCLK1
13
CCD-CP
14
AFE-SDI
15
CCD-CK2
16
GND
17
CCD-CK1
18
AFE-SEN
19
ADCLK
20
GND
21
AFE-SCK
22
DB7
23
MODE-SW
24
DB5
25
DB6
26
GND
27
DB4
28
DB3
29
DB2
30
DB1
31
DB0
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
NB
NA
+24V
1
2
Pick Up
Solenoid
M
2nd Feeder
Motor
120 / 220-240 VAC

+24 VDC
+12 VDC
+5 VDC
+3.3 VDC
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

PARTS WITH A
MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY.
WHEN SERVICING, IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED PARTS ARE USED FOR
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS
IDENTIFIED WITH A
MARK IN THE SCHEMATIC.
Model
*1 : Japan specification only
342
1
nMOEN_OP
2
nPON_OP
3
nOPTION
4
nPUCTL_OP
5
24VGND
6
+5V
7
+24V
8
CLOCK_OP
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CCD
GND
1
2
3
4
P603
D+
SPC (SCANNER)
D-
P101
CN305
VBUS
+5VP
KIN4
1
2
3
4
5
ADF_STAMP
GND
LED9
1
2
GND
ADF_PAPER_S1
LEDCT0
LED8
PA03
Cover Sensor
1
2
3
KIN0
KIN1
KIN7
KIN2
N.C.
KIN3
SCN[6]
SCN[3]
SCN[0]
SCN[1]
SCN[2]
LED6
nSCNDOR
LEDCT1
N.C.
LEDCT0
GND
nSLPKY
nLEDSLP
+SLP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
4
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND
+24V
VCC
+24V
nSCNRST
1
2
3
4
CN600
CN601
PUSOL_CTL1
nAPNT
2nd
Feeder
1
2
nBOOK
CN602
CN2
INVERTER
+5VP
OUT4
1
2
3
4
GND
+5V
OUT3
INV_SW
GND
OUT2
1
2
3
+12V
OUT1
+24V
GND
1
2
3
4
2nd Paper
Feed Module
(OPTION)
5VGND
LAMP
Scanner
Motor
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Home Detect
Sensor
+24V
P105
+24V
P106
CN304
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Registration
Sensor
ADF Motor
CN1
(QWERTY Keys)
CN262
CN263
PNL2
CN256
CN251
CN252
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
LEDCT1
LEDCT2
LED7
LEDCT3
LED8
LEDCT4
LED9
nLEDAT
LEDCT0
nLEDALM
SCN[7]
nLEDACT
+ACT
SCN[6]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
+ALM
SCN[5]
N.C.
CN255
CN232
CN231
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
+DAT
GND
N.C.
SCN[9]
SCN[8]
SCN[10]
KIN0
SCN[11]
KIN1
KIN7
KIN2
KIN6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
KIN3
CN452
CN501
P102
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
CN230
(PNL CPU)
CN233
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
KIN5
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3V
+5VB
pCMLD
nHKOF5V
nMVOL2
nMVOL1
nMVOL0
n5VMTON
nMDMRST
CN223
CN234
KIN4
Front Cover Safety

Interlock SW
Paper Sensor
Ver. 3.0
5VGND
+5V(LD)
5VGND
nVIDEO
nADUST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
nLDON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
FANNERR
1
2
3
FANPER
24VGND
nMMHALF
nMMLD
nMMCTL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24VGND
+24VIR
+24VIR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+5VSP
1
2
3
PNON
5VGND
nEXITSEN
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5VGND
1
2
3
4
+5VSP
nTOPSEN
nREGSEN
1
2
3
4
5
EXITSOL_CTL
1
N.C
2
24VGND
3
FDD8721
1
2
24VGND
REGSOL_CTL
1
2
24VGND
1
2
5VGND
nTESEN
1
2
24VGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
8
16
14
12
10
4
2
SCN[2]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCN[0]
SCN[1]
HPMB
PS
V0
V4
V3
V2
V1
C2-
C2+
C1+
C1-
C3+
C4+
VOUT
VSS
Vc1
VDD
DB7
DB6
DB5
DB4
DB2
DB3
DB1
DB0
E_RDB
RW_WRD
RS
RESETB
CSB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
CN261
CN264
nBOOK
GND
GND
nWAKEUP
nSLPKY
nLPOW1
1
2
PNL5
BAT
LCD
BZCLK
pPNLRST
PNLTXD
PNLRXD
+5VP
+5V
GND
nCSMON
T2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
GND
+24V
nMDMINT
nEBCOE
nEBCWBE[0]
BZCLK
nFXBWUP
nFXBSET
EBC3A[31]
EBC3A[30]
EBC3A[29]
EBC3A[28]
EBC3A[27]
EBC3A[26]
EBC3A[25]
EBC3A[24]
EBC3A[23]
FXB
3
4
SPEAKER
N.C.
T1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CN257
CN221
1 pin
GND
nBook
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN253
CN254
PNL4
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L1(R)
T1
CN114
T2
L2(T)
PNL1
ALARM ACTIVE
CN008
USB I/F
1
2
3
4
5
6
N.C.
3
4
CN220
DATA
+5VGND
nFCTL
ZCIN
nFCTL
nMPOW1
GND
+5VP
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+24V
+24V
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
T2
T1
CN306
Scanner Door
Sensor
CN007
CN2
CN143
CN141
CN102
CN110
1
2
LEDCT4
3
LED0
4
LED1
5
LED2
6
LED3
7
LED4
8
LED5
9
BAT+
10
GND
1
2
+3.3V
3
GND
4
GND
5
CT1
6
RXD+
7
RXD8
YLA
9
YLK(GND)
10
GLK(GND)
11
GLA
12
TXD-
13
15
17
1
3
5
7
9
11
18
DASP
TXD+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATCS0
CN330
SCN[5]
ATCS1
GND
Process
Interlock SW
CN331
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATA2
CN006
CN310
LEDCT2
LEDCT3
ATA0
D+
SCN[4]
N.C.
CN003
SDRAM I / F (72 pin)
CN112
ATA1
1
2
3
4
D-
KIN6
GND
IO16
CN010
SORT
MEMORY
I/F (8 pin)
KIN5
ATAINT
VBUS
KIN3
KIN4
N.C.
GND
CN324
*1
EXT. TEL
N.C.
CN329
EBC3A[22]
ATIORDY
CN328
EBC3A[21]
GND
CN327
CN111
ATIRD
HARDWARE
KEY
EBC3D[7]
EBC3A[20]
GND
CN002
CN308
F-ROM
CARD
F-ROM CARD I/F (68 pin)
EBC3D[6]
GND
ATIOWR
CN018
CN001
FRM
EBC3D[5]
N.C.
LAMP
EBC3D[4]
N.C.
TST
FRM SLOT2 (60 pin)
EBC3D[3]
GND
TST
FRM
EBC3D[2]
ATD15
CN017
Engine Control
FRM SLOT1 (60 pin)
CN302
EBC3D[1]
ATD0
CN016
CN453
EBC3D[0]
ATD14
CN015
SC
LINE
ATD1
CN014
CN013
CN301
GND
ATD13
Laser
Diode
CN450
HVPS
GND
ATD2
CN012
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
ATD12
CN011
CN300
MECHANICAL
COUNTER
(OPTION)
+5VP
ATD3
CN009
CN402
TH
+24V
ATD11
1
2
No Paper
Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
ATD4
CN401
CN005
CN113
ATD10
Registration/Paper
Detect Sensor
LSU Motor
LSU
Fan
Motor
ACL
HANDSET
(OPTION)
ATD5
NC
2
1
CN101
CN311
ATD9
3
2
1
1 +24V
KCCNT
2
ATD6
LVPS
CN322
HDD
(OPTION)
ATD8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
GND
+5V
TH
FUSER
UNIT
ACN
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
Thermistor
Live: Brown
Neutral: Blue
USB
PRINTER I/F
ATRST
GND
ATD7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
DC
LAN I/F
41
GND
42
+5V
43
+5V
44
FG
FG
CN309
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PUSOL_CTL
1
2
1
2
CN451
Main Motor
Paper
Exit/ADU
Paper Jam
Sensor
5VGND
5VGND
Pick Up Registration
Solenoid
Solenoid
Low Toner
Sensor
24VGND
Exit
Solenoid
5VGND
Power
SW
Inlet
Power
Cord
+5V
Inlet
Power
Cord
1
2
3
4
5
Power
SW
120 VAC
UF-9000
DP-180/190
Drawing Name
General Circuit
Diagram
APR 2006
UF-9000
DP-180/190
memo
Ver. 3.0
343
APR 2006
88
Panasonic
Software
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-13
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2.
Installation
2.1
Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4
2.2
Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4
2.3
Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3.
Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1
For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
6
3.1.2
For other models
6
3.2
4.
Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
Using the Network Firmware Update Tool
1st Edition :
2002 March 20
2nd Edition :
2002 August 1
3rd Edition :
2002 December 5
4th Edition :
2003 April 10
5th Edition :
2003 April 22
6th Edition :
2003 December 18
7th Edition :
2004 April 7
8th Edition :
2004 August 3
9th Edition :
2004 August 20
10th Edition :
2004 October 22
11th Edition :
2005 March 18
12th Edition :
2006 March 27
13th Edition :
2006 Ma 08
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
1.
Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
2.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.
3.
Enter the installation password.

Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.
4.
Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.
5.
The completion message is displayed when the installation is completed.

Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool
1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
Firmware Update, then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
2.
The Configuration dialog box appears.

General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.
File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the Local Firmware Folder.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.
3.
Page 4
Click [OK] to finish the setup.

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool
The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.
1.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update, then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
3.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.
4.
The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed.
Page 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1
For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
1.
If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box, or enter the password at each communication.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2
1.
For other models

If the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) is
changed from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In
this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box,
or enter the password at each communication.
For the 3-digit Key Operator Password devices, only the first three digits 000 of the default value
are singled out of the 4-digit 0000 value.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note:
It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.
Please close all applications that are currently running.

Note: When using the Network Firmware Update Tool on Windows 2000/XP OS, you must be
logged on as an Administrator.
2.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].
Note:
1) Make sure the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation
Password) on the remote unit and the password on this application are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate, or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update will fail, and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails, and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than
20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using
the Local Firmware Update Tool, or with the FROM card.
3.
Click [Device Address List].
Page 7

4.
Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input, or Device Address List.
Click [OK].
5.
Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [Next>].
Page 8

6.
Specify the Firmware Code File using the

following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
With this choice you can directly select the
Firmware Code Archive File.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically,
and it is chosen as a set when the update
of multiple firmware code files are
necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly from here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders from here.
Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 is not shown.
6a1

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
Page 9

6a2
Select the Firmware Archive file, and

click [Open].
Ex: DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe
6a3
Extracting...
6a4
Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].
6a5
Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10

6b1

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete
Set)", and click [Browse...] button.
6b2
Select the Parent File Folder, and Click [OK].

Ex: \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3
Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].
Page 11

6b4

Click [Next>].
6c1
Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders", and
click [Browse...] button.
6c2
Select the Firmware Code File Folder, and

click [OK].
Ex: SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
Page 12

6c3
Select the other Firmware Code File Folder,

and click [OK].
6c4

Click [Next>].
7.
The version check for the specified devices

starts.
Click [Next>].
Page 13

8.
Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.
Then click [Next>].
Note: If "Send at once" is checked, all
firmware will be sent at once, and then
erase, write and reboot.
If "Send at once" is checked out, each
firmware (SC, PNL, SPC, etc...) are
transmitted separately, and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
This "Send at once", function cannot be
used if the model is DP-6010 / 4510 /
3510, firmware type is PCL or PS, and
the unit SC version is V1.xxxx.
9.
Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].
10. Data is transferred to the Spooler, and the

update is started.
The Spooler screen appears automatically

showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.
Page 14

11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in
the spooler disappear, and the communication

log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.
After each firmware code is successfully
programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.
Page 15
Published in Japan
Panasonic
Software
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-16
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2.
Installation
2.1
Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4
2.2
Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4
2.3
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4
Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3.
Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7
3.2
Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4.
Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
1st Edition :
2nd Edition :
1999 February 10
1999 September 30
3rd Edition :
2000 September 8
4th Edition :
2000 November 28
5th Edition :
2001 June 20
6th Edition :
2001 September 7
7th Edition :
2003 April 10
8th Edition :
2003 April 22
9th Edition :
2003 December 18
10th Edition :
2004 January 19
11th Edition :
2004 February 10
12th Edition :
2004 April 20
13th Edition :
2004 August 3
14th Edition :
2004 August 20
15th Edition :
2004 October 22
16th Edition :
2005 March 18
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
Windows 2000 / XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1
Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
your PC.
Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2
Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.
Installation Destination Folder

Click [Next] button.
Program Folder
Click [Next] button.
Page 4
Copying...
The installation is completed.

Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to
restart your PC.
2.3
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service
Manual.
Searching...
Installing driver...
When the install screen disappears, the

installation of the Firmware Update (USB)
Driver is completed.
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5

2.4
Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.
1.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
3.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.
4.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using
Network Firmware Update Tool, the
authority more than a Power User is
required.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

Parallel.
Click [Next>].
Note: The Firmware Update Driver (USB) is

only displayed if you installed it with the
unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Status Monitor
Port Controller
Specify the Firmware Code File by the

following methods.
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
--> Step 5b1
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
5a2
Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3
Extracting...
Page 9

5a4
Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
5a5

Click [Next>].
Page 10

5b1
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

5b2
Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3
Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11

5b4

Click [Next>].
Page 12

5c1
Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.
5c2
Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3

Click [Next>].
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are

indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.
On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

When there is more than one file to be
updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit:

they are transferred in turn automatically if the
unit is ready to receive the next firmware code
file.
Note: If you are updating the
DP-2310/3010, the sending of
sequential multiple files to the unit
isn't done automatically. The
"Waiting..." display on the PC will not
advance to "Executing..." until you set
the unit back to USB Firmware
Update on the machine to start
receiving the next file. See Unit
information of the Firmware
Update Mode on the next page.
For Parallel connected unit:
the confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.
Page 14

Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:
For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to
USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the
firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the
PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code
file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.
For USB Connected Unit (Other models):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the
firmware update automatically.
When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and
return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The
display returns to Update in Progress) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware
code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
When the transfers of all the firmware files are

finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note: For USB Connected Unit only.

When the unit returns to standby, Plug
and Play of the printer will popup.
Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug
and Play window.
Page 15
Published in Japan

UF 9000 Service Manual v3 0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UF 9000 Service Manual v3 0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Order Number: MGCS031201C0

2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit

Control Panel ............................................9

Fax, Printer and Internet Fax

Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan ......36

Sensors and PC Boards .........................36

Installation ............................................. 255

Set Up Precautions .............................. 255

Unpacking ............................................ 257

Installation Procedure .......................... 258

Options and Supplies ............................ 264

Service Notes "Firmware Update"

Installing the Printer Controller Module

Installing the Printer Controller Module

Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit

Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board

Installing the Sorting Image Memory

Installing the Expansion Flash Memory

Disassembly Instructions ......................... 37

Disassembly Instructions ........................38

Hardware Identification Template ...........69

Signal Waveform .................................. 203

Maintenance, Adjustments and Check

Preventive Maintenance .........................71

Required Tools .......................................73

Preventive Maintenance Points ..............74

Preventive Maintenance Check List .......75

Updating the Firmware ...........................76

Adjusting the Printer Registration,

Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module

Installing the Handset Kit

Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............88

Improper LCD Display ............................89

Printed Copy Quality Problems...............90

Document Feeder (ADF) ......................106

Network Protocol .................................. 297

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......115

Layer Functions and Technology ......... 299

Error Codes (For Copier) ......................123

Network Layer ...................................... 303

Information Code Table

Transport Layer .................................... 307

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........137

Upper Layer ......................................... 309

ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................ 315

Communication Protocols .................... 321

8.10. Installing the Mechanical Counter Kit

General Network Information................. 297

4.10. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................144

Service Modes ....................................... 146

Service Modes (For Copier)..................146

Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............163

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 327

System Description................................ 194

Scanning / Transmit Mechanism ..........194

Control Panel ........................................195

Printer / Receive Mechanism................196

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail

Schematic Diagram ............................... 342

<Navy Blue Control Panel>

For USA only

For Euro and Other Destinations

For USA only